Chemistry 351 and 352 Physical Chemistry I and II

Darin J. Ulness Fall 2006 – 2007

Contents
I Basic Quantum Mechanics 15
16 16 17 17 22 22 23 24 27 27 27 29 30 31 31 34 38 40

1 Quantum Theory 1.1 The “Fall” of Classical Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Bohr’s Atomic Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 First Attempts at the Structure of the Atom . . . . . . . . 2 The Postulates of Quantum Mechanics 2.1 Postulate I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 How to normalize a wavefunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Postulates II and II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Setup of a Quantum Mechanical Problem The Hamiltonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Quantum Mechanical Problem . . . . . . . The Average Value Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . The Heisenberg Uncertainty Principle . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

4 Particle in a Box 4.1 The 1D Particle in a Box Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Implications of the Particle in a Box problem . . . . . . . . . . . 5 The Harmonic Oscillator 5.1 Interesting Aspects of the Quantum Harmonic Oscillator . . . . . i

5.2 Spectroscopy (An Introduction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42

II

Quantum Mechanics of Atoms and Molecules

45
46 46 49 51 52 55 55 56 58 59 60 60 61 62 63 64 66 67 67 68 72 72 73

6 Hydrogenic Systems 6.1 Hydrogenic systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Discussion of the Wavefunctions . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Spin of the electron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Summary: the Complete Hydrogenic Wavefunction 7 Multi-electron atoms 7.1 Two Electron Atoms: Helium 7.2 The Pauli Exclusion Principle 7.3 Many Electron Atoms . . . . 7.3.1 The Total Hamiltonian

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

8 Diatomic Molecules and the Born Oppenheimer Approximation 8.1 Molecular Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 The Hamiltonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 The Born—Oppenheimer Approximation . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Molecular Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 The Morse Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Vibrational Spectroscopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Molecular Orbital Theory and Symmetry 9.1 Molecular Orbital Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Molecular Orbital Diagrams 10.1 LCAO–Linear Combinations of Atomic Orbitals . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Classification of Molecular Orbitals . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2 The Hydrogen Molecule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Molecular Orbital Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 The Complete Molecular Hamiltonian and Wavefunction . . . . . 11 An Aside: Light Scattering–Why the Sky is Blue 11.1 The Classical Electrodynamics Treatment of Light Scattering 11.2 The Blue Sky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Sunsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 White Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74 76 78 79 79 81 82 83

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

III Statistical Mechanics and The Laws of Thermodynamics 88
12 Rudiments of Statistical Mechanics 12.1 Statistics and Entropy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 Combinations and Permutations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 Fluctuations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 The Boltzmann Distribution 13.1 Partition Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1.1 Relation between the Q and W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 The Molecular Partition Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Statistical Thermodynamics 15 Work 15.1 Properties of Partial Derivatives 15.1.1 Summary of Relations . 15.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.1 Types of Systems . . . . 15.2.2 System Parameters . . . 89 89 90 92 94 96 97 99 103 107 107 107 108 108 109

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

15.3 Work and Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 15.3.1 Generalized Forces and Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . 110 15.3.2 P V work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 16 Maximum Work and Reversible changes 16.1 Maximal Work: Reversible versus Irreversible changes . . 16.2 Heat Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3 Equations of State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.1 Example 1: The Ideal Gas Law . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Example 2: The van der Waals Equation of State 16.3.3 Other Equations of State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 113 115 116 116 117 118

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

17 The Zeroth and First Laws of Thermodynamics 119 17.1 Temperature and the Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics . . . . . . . 119 17.2 The First Law of Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 17.2.1 The internal energy state function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 18 The Second and Third Laws of Thermodynamics 18.1 Entropy and the Second Law of Thermodynamics . 18.1.1 Statements of the Second Law . . . . . . . . 18.2 The Third Law of Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . 18.2.1 The Third Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.2 Debye’s Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3 Times Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 124 127 127 128 129 130

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

IV

Basics of Thermodynamics

134

19 Auxillary Functions and Maxwell Relations 135 19.1 The Other Important State Functions of Thermodynamics . . . . 135 19.2 Enthalpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 19.2.1 Heuristic definition: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

19.3 Helmholtz Free Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.1 Heuristic definition: . . . . . . . . . . 19.4 Gibbs Free Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.1 Heuristic definition: . . . . . . . . . . 19.5 Heat Capacity of Gases . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.1 The Relationship Between CP and CV 19.6 The Maxwell Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Chemical Potential 20.1 Spontaneity of processes . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2 Chemical potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3 Activity and the Activity coefficient . . . . . 20.3.1 Reference States . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.2 Activity and the Chemical Potential

. . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

137 138 138 139 139 139 140 142 142 144 146 147 148

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

21 Equilibrium 151 21.0.3 Equilibrium constants in terms of KC . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 21.0.4 The Partition Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 22 Chemical Reactions 22.1 Heats of Reactions . . . . . . . 22.1.1 Heats of Formation . . . 22.1.2 Temperature dependence 22.2 Reversible reactions . . . . . . . 22.3 Temperature Dependence of Ka 22.4 Extent of Reaction . . . . . . . 156 156 157 157 158 159 160

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . of the heat of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

23 Ionics 161 23.1 Ionic Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 23.1.1 Ionic activity coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 23.2 Theory of Electrolytic Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

23.3 Ion Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 23.3.1 Ion mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 24 Thermodynamics of Solvation 24.1 The Born Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.1 Free Energy of Solvation for the Born 24.1.2 Ion Transfer Between Phases . . . . . 24.1.3 Enthalpy and Entropy of Solvation . 24.2 Corrections to the Born Model . . . . . . . . 25 Key Equations for Exam 4 169 170 173 174 174 175 177

. . . . Model . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

V

Quantum Mechanics and Dynamics

180

26 Particle in a 3D Box 181 26.1 Particle in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 26.2 The 3D Particle in a Box Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 27 Operators 187 27.1 Operator Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 27.2 Orthogonality, Completeness, and the Superposition Principle . . 191 28 Angular Momentum 28.1 Classical Theory of Angular Momentum . . 28.2 Quantum theory of Angular Momentum . . 28.3 Particle on a Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4 General Theory of Angular Momentum . . . 28.5 Quantum Properties of Angular Momentum 28.5.1 The rigid rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 192 193 194 195 199 200

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32. . . .3. . . . . .1 Normal Modes . 209 31 The Two Level System and Quantum Dynamics 211 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32. . . . . . . . .1 Molecular Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . .1 The Two Level System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Spin Orbit Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Perturbation Theory . . . . . . . . .2 An Example: Two Electrons . . . . . . . 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Molecules and Symmetry 228 33. . . . . . . . . . General .1 The Addition of Angular Momentum: 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Symmetry of Functions . . . . . .2 Normal Modes and Group Theory . . . . . . . . . .2. . . 32. 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Example: The C2v Group . 29. . . . . . . . .2. 32. . . . 29. . . 201 201 202 202 203 204 205 30 Approximation Techniques 207 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Variational method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Mathematical Groups . . . .2. . . . . 229 . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Spin Angular Momentum .1. .2. . . . . .2 Quantum Dynamics . . . . . . . 211 31. .4 Symmetry Breaking and Crystal Field Splitting . . . . 29. . .2 Addition of Angular Momentum . . . . . . . . .1 Symmetry Operators . . . . . . 228 33. . . . . . . 214 VI Symmetry and Spectroscopy 220 221 222 222 223 223 225 225 32 Symmetry and Group Theory 32. . . . . . . . . . .29 Addition of Angular Momentum 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Direct Products . . . 229 33.3 Term Symbols . . . . . . Theory . . .

. . . .1 The Fourier transformation . .2. . . . . . . . . . . 252 39 The Rate Laws of Chemical Kinetics 39. . . . . .3 Rotation of Polyatomic Molecules . . . . . . . . . . .1 kinetic theory of gases . . . . . . . . . . . 39. 36. .2 Determination of Rate Laws . . . 39. 250 38. . . .2 Molecular Collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Differential methods based on the rate law 39. . . . . .2 Franck—Condon activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Fourier Transforms 245 37. . . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. . . .2 Rotational Spectroscopy . . . . . . . . .2 Integrated rate laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 IR Spectroscopy . . . . .1 Rate Laws . . . . . . . . 36 Electronic Spectroscopy of Molecules 36. . . . .1 Relaxing the rigid rotor . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . .3 Fluorescence Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 35 Molecular Rotations 35. . . . . . . . . . . 245 VII Kinetics and Gases 249 38 Physical Kinetics 250 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 254 258 259 259 . . .1 Absorption Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Vibrational Spectroscopy and Group Theory 231 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 34. . . .2. .1 The Franck—Condon principle 235 236 236 237 240 240 241 241 242 243 243 . .2 Raman Spectroscopy . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The Structure of the Electronic State 36. . . . . . . . . 35. . . 36. . . . . . . . .1. . . .2 Emission Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .1 The Relationship Between CP and CV . . .1 α and κT for an ideal gas . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . .1 P. . 42. . . . . . . . . 41. . .2 Theory of Reaction Rates . 42. .2 α and κT for liquids and solids . . . . . . . . 42. .3 When P is the more convenient variable . . . .1 Temperature corrections to the Arrhenious 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. 42.3 The Virial Series in Pressure . . . . . . . . . 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . parameters . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . 42. . . .1 Relation to the van der Waals Equation of State 41. . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . .1. . . . . . 261 261 262 262 265 267 269 269 270 271 272 272 273 274 274 275 275 276 276 279 279 280 281 282 283 41 Gases and the Virial Series 41. . . . . 42. . . . . .1 Isothermal and Adiabatic expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. V and T behavior . . . . .3 Multistep Reactions . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Chain Reactions . .5 Joule-Thomson expansion . . . . . . .40 Temperature and Chemical Kinetics 40. 286 43.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . . 42. 41. . . . . 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Behavior of Gases 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .2 The Boyle Temperature . . . . . . .1 Equations of State . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . .2 Heat Capacity of Gases Revisited . .2 The Virial Series . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Calculation of Entropy . . . . .3 Expansion of Gases .1 Temperature Effects on Rate Constants . .2. . . . . . . . . . .4 Joule expansion . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .4 Estimation of Virial Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Entropy of Gases 286 43. . . . . . .1 Entropy of Real Gases .3. . . . 288 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .2 Heat capacity CV for adiabatic expansions 42. .

3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. .3 Vapor Equilibrium and the Clausius-Clapeyron Equation 44. . . . .1 Critical Behavior of fluids . . .1 Measures of Composition . . .3. . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Ideal Solutions (RL) . . . . .2 Thermal Conductivity of 46 Solutions 46.2 Partial Molar Quantities .2 Gas Constants from Critical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Reference states for liquids . 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. . . . . . . Gases and Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The Clapeyron Equation . . . . . . . . . . 46. . . . . .3. . . . . .4 Henry’s Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . .1 Gas Laws in the Critical Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .2 The Law of Corresponding States . . . .4 Equilibria of condensed phases . . . . . . 44.VIII More Thermodyanmics 292 293 293 294 295 296 296 297 298 298 299 300 301 301 303 305 306 307 308 308 308 309 310 311 311 312 314 316 44 Critical Phenomena 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .1 Activity (a brief review) 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . 44. .3.2 Viscosity . . . . 45 Transport Properties of Fluids 45. . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . .1 Thermal Conductivity of 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Notation . . . . . .1 The chemical potential and T and P . . . 46. . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Triple Point and Phase Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Diffusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquids . . . . 45. . .3 Phase Equilibrium . . . . . . .3 Thermal conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 46.2 Partial Molar Volumes . . . .3. 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. 46. . . .2 Raoult’s Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 322 322 324 325 326 328 330 331 . .4 Colligative Properties . . . .2 The Second Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 46. . . . . .5 Echo Phenonmena . . . . . . . . . 319 47 Entropy Production and Irreverisble Thermodynamics 47. . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . .1 Entropy Production due to Heat Flow . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .1 Fundamentals . . . . . . .2 Osmotic Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . 318 46. . . . . . . . . .1 Freezing Point Depression . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Examples . .4. . . .2 Entropy Production due to Chemical Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . 47. . . . . .4 Thermodynamic Coupling . . . . . . . . . .46. .

Chemistry 351: Physical Chemistry I 1 1 .

Keep in mind this chapter provides some examples of how to solve problems for both physical chemistry I and physical chemistry II. you can still learn a lot be working these and looking that their solutions in the solution manual. Simply skip those examples as you scan through this chapter. Tips for solving problems Working problem sets is the heart and sole of learning physical chemistry. This takes time and hard work. But there are some things that you can do to help yourself with these problems. Consequently early in the course some of the examples might seem very itimidating. Tips 2 2 . so it might be helpful to you to see some of these problems worked out. The only way that you can be sure that you understand a concept at to be able to solve the problems associated with it.Solved Problems I make-up most of the problems on the problems sets. Even though there aren’t many “book” problems assigned during the year.

. • Do not worry about not knowing how to solve it yet. Budget your time so that you don’t have to work on an overwhelming number of problems at a time. You can do the problem.1. 2. • Just identify the general ideas that you think you might need. If you think you can’t do the problem then maybe you need try a different way of thinking about it. Remember nobody cares if you solve any particular problem on the problem set. Try to whip-off a few on the same day that you get the problem set. 5.. • Do not be afraid. They have all been solved before. • Read the question carefully • Try to think about what topic(s) in lecture and in the notes the problem is dealing with. 3 . This will make the problem sets much more efficient at helping you learn. 3. Try to figure out what mathematical techniques you need to express the solution to the problem. try to identify subsections of it. 4. so if you solve them you will not become famous nor will you save the world. I don’t assign problems that you cannot do. For problems that require a mathematical approach. Then work on them consistently during the week. Part of the trouble is simply understanding what the problem is asking you to do. • Determine wether you need to approach the problem mathematically or conceptually or both. There is a tendency to try to start solving the problem before fully understanding the question. • If the question is long. The only reason you work them is to learn.

. • Look for self-consistency. Does you final answer jive with what you know.• Do the math. It might take some review on your part. ±2 . For problems that require a conceptual approach. . • Always check to see if the math makes sense when you are done. n = 0. Therefore the entire function has a period of π. The second function we should remember from trig as having a period of 2π. • Make sure that the physical idea that you are using in your argument is correct. Finally for the last function it is best to used Euler’s identity and write e−2ix = cos 2x + i sin 2x (1) The real part of this function. so the periodicity is π. 4 . Problems Dealing With Quantum Mechanics Problem: What is the periodicity of the following functions • f (x) = sin2 x • f (x) = cos x • f(x) = e−2ix Solution: For the first function it is easiest to see the periodicity by writing the function as f (x) = (sin x)(sin x). If you are not sure. has a period of π as does the imaginary part. either you will be able to do this or you won’t. We know that this function will repeat zeros when ever sin x = 0. This occurs at x = nπ. cos 2x. start with a related concept that is better known by you. sin 2x. 6... . ±1.

What is the probability of finding the object further than α away from the origin ( x = 0)? 2 5 .Problem: Which of the following functions are eigenfunction of the momentum d operator. this function is not an eigenfunction of the momentum operator. no. If ˆ this equation is true then the function is an eigenfunction with eigenvalue λ. ˆ • ψ(x) = eikx • ψ(x) = e−αx 2 • ψ(x) = cos kx Solution: We need to determine if px ψ(x) = λψ(x) where λ is a constant. no. multiply by −i~ and check to see if the eigenvalue equation holds. For the case of momentum all we need to do is take the derivative of each function. For the first function px ψ(x) = −i~ ˆ deikx dψ(x) = −i~ = ~keikx = ~kψ(x). yes. For the last function z }| { d cos kx dψ(x) = −i~ = −i~k sin kx. dx dx 2 (3) so. this function is an eigenfunction of the momentum operator. dx dx (2) so. Problem: A quantum object is described by the wavefunction ψ(x) = e−αx . px ψ(x) = −i~ ˆ dx dx 6=cos kx (4) so. px = −i~ dx . For the second function px ψ(x) = −i~ ˆ de−αx dψ(x) ↓ 2 = −i~ = 2i~αxe−αx = 2i~αxψ(x). this function is not and eigenfunction of the momentum operator.

so we should assume that it isn’t. The limits of the integral in the denominator represent all space for the object. ψunnorm we know that this function must simply be some constant N multiplied by the normalized version of this function: ψ unnorm = Nψnorm We have shown generally that N is given by sZ N= |ψunnorm (x)|2 dx. To do this using an unnormalized wavefunction we must evaluate R −α R∞ |ψ(x)|2 dx + α |ψ(x)|2 dx P (|x| > α) = −∞ R∞ .The first integral in the numerator gives the probability that the object is at a position x < −α and the second integral in the numerator gives the probability for x > α. Plugging in the wavefunctions we have R −α −2αx2 R∞ 2 e dx + α e−2αx dx −∞ R∞ P (|x| > α) = . Solution: Following our general procedure from the notes if we have some unnormalized wavefunction. (6) e−2αx2 dx −∞ Mathematica can assist with these integrals to give the final answer of √ 3 P (|x| > α) = erfc[ 2α 2 ]. The denominator accounts for the fact that the wavefunction is unnormalized. but we won’t. (7) Solution: First of all we do not know if this wavefunction is normalized. space (8) (9) 6 . We are interested in finding the probability that the object is outside of the region −α < x < α. If you were working with a normalized wavefunction the denominator would be equal to 1 and hence not needed. (5) |ψ(x)|2 dx −∞ Problem: A quantum object is described by the wavefunction ψ(x) = e−γx over the range 0 ≤ x < ∞. We could normalize this wavefunction. Normalize this wavefunction.

2γ (13) So on average you will find the object at x = 1 . Generally and average is calculated as Z ψ∗ (x)ˆψ(x). o (12) hˆi = o space which in this case is Z ∞p Z p −γx −γx hˆi = x 2γe x 2γe dx = 2γ 0 ∞ xe−2γx dx = 0 1 . What is the average position of the object? Solution: We need to work with the normalized wavefunction that we found in √ the previous problem. ψ(x) = 2γe−γx . (14) Remember the extra r2 sin θ is needed when integrating in spherical polar coordinates. 2γ Problem: What is the probability of finding an electron in the 1s state of hydrogen further than one Bohr radius away from the nucleus? Solution: We need to evaluate Z P (r > a0 ) = 2π 0 Z π 0 Z ∞ a0 |ψ1s |2 r2 sin θdrdθdφ. The normalized 1s wavefunction is 1 ψ1s = p 3 er/a0 . Problem: A quantum object is described by the wavefunction ψ(x) = e−γx over the range 0 ≤ x < ∞. πa0 (15) 7 .Which for this case is N= sZ ∞ 0 |e−γx |2 dx = sZ ∞ e−2γx dx = 0 r 1 2γ (10) So finally we get the normalized wavefunction by rearanging ψunnorm = Nψnorm : p (11) ψnorm (x) = 2γe−γx .

What is the force constant associated with the Morse potential? Solution: The Morse potential is £ ¤ V (x) = De 1 − e−β(R−Req ) . Verify that the coefficient for the linear term is zero. about 68% of the time the electron would be found at some distance greater then one Bohr radius from the proton. z) as a product state. (19) 8 . Therefore the appropriate product state is Ψ(x. (18) Problem: Expand the Morse potential in a Taylor’s series about Req . To see this we write out the Laplacian to get µ ¶ −~2 ∂ 2 ∂2 ∂2 ˆ H= . Ψ(x.We can do this integral by hand or have Mathematica help us to give P (r > a0 ) = 5 = 0. but all it is asking is to express the wavefunction. y.677. We know that if the wavefunction is to be a product state then the Hamiltonian must be made up of a sum of independent terms. which is a function of the three spatial dimensions. z) = ψ(x)ψ(y)ψ(z). Solution: This problem appears hard at first since we are not studying three dimensional systems. 2 ˆ H = −~ ∇2 . Express the wavefunction (in Cartesian coordinates) as a product 2m state. Problem: A free particle in three dimensions is described by the Hamiltonian. y. a term depending only on y and a term that depends only on z. e2 (16) So. (17) + + 2m ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 We see that indeed the Hamiltonian is a sum of term that depends only on x.

Solution: This problem requires the we think qualitatively about the wavefunctions and the potentials for the harmonic oscillator and the Morse oscillator. yes the coefficient of the linear term (the term involving (R − Req ) to the first power) is zero. compare hRi as a function of the vibrational quantum number for a diatomic modelled as a harmonic oscillator versus a Morse oscillator. The potential for the harmonic oscillator is described by a parabola centered about the equilibrium bond length. Hence no mater what the vibrational quantum number is there is just as much of the wavefunction on either side equilibrium thus hRi = Req for any quantum number. Therefore without performing any calculations we can at least say that hRi increases as the quantum number increases. Problem: Without performing any calculations. The Taylor series about Req for this function is ¯ ¯ 2 ¯ dV (x) ¯ ¯ (R − Req ) + 1 d V (x) ¯ (R − Req )2 + · · · . How many molecules are in the first excited state of the ‘ring breathing’ mode (992 cm −1 )? How 9 . The Morse potential does not have this symmetry. This will always be true when you perform a Taylor series expansion about a minimum (or maximum). It is steeper on the “short” side of equilibrium and softer on the “long” side of equilibrium and this “softness” increases with increasing quantum number. (20) V (x) = V (x)|Req + dx ¯Req 2! dx2 ¯Req | {z } | {z } | {z } =0 =0 = β 2 De Problems Dealing With Statistical Mechanics and Thermodynamics Problem: A vial containing 10 20 benzene molecules is at 300K.So. The force constant is given by the coefficient of the quadratic term so in this case k = β 2 De .

841% of the benzene molecules are in the 1020 13 first vibrational excited state for the ring breathing mode and 4. Each of the atoms can be in one of three states A. ¶ ³ µ ´ 3×992 992 rb × e− 2×208 × 1020 = 8. Problem: Consider a linear chain of N atoms. So.02×10 × 100% = 1020 0. 0 1 1 ⎡ (24) ¶ ³ µ ´ 3063 − 3×3063 2×208 × 1020 = 4.02 × 1013 .many are in the first excited state of the symmetric C—H vibrational mode (3063 cm −1 )? Solution: This is a problem that deals with the Boltzmann distribution.0000402% of the benzene molecules are in the first excited state for the C—H stretching mode. V (j+1) = MV (j) .41 × 1017 Nv=1 = 2 sinh (21) 2 × 208 and C—H Nv=1 We see that about 8. except that an atom in state A can not be adjacent to an atom in state C. × e = 2 sinh 2 × 208 17 (22) (25) 10 . V = ⎣ 3 ⎦. where for this example ⎤ 1 1 0 ⎥ ⎢ M = ⎣ 1 1 1 ⎦. Find the entropy per atom for this system as N → ∞. V = ⎣ 7 ⎦. B or C. ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ 1 2 5 ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ (1) (2) (3) (23) V = ⎣ 1 ⎦. To solve this problem it is useful to define the set of three dimensional column vectors V (j) such that the three elements are the total number of allowed configurations of a j-atom chain having the j th atom in state A. B or C. For example.··· . 1 2 5 The V (j+1) can be found from the V (j) vector using the matrix equation.41×10 × 100% = 0.

4. 3. 1. 12 5 1 . Use M to find V (4) 2. Remembering that V (3) gives us the number of sequences that end in a given state we should organize our list in the same manner States ending in A States ending in B AAA ABA BAA BBA CBA AAB ABB BAB BBB BCB CBB CCB √ 7 states States ending in C ABC BBC BCC CBC Solution: For part (a) we simply problem (we are given V (3) ): ⎡ 1 1 ⎢ (4) V =⎣ 1 1 0 1 use the transfer matrix as directed in the ⎤ ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎡ 12 5 0 ⎥ ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 1 ⎦ ⎣ 7 ⎦ = ⎣ 17 ⎦ . For part (b) we need to list all states for the case of N = 3 and verify the we get the same result as calculated using the transfer matrix. 5 states √ 5 states √ 11 . Use Boltzmann’s equation to find the entropy per atom for this chain as N goes to infinity. max where λmax is the largest eigenvalue of M. Verify V (3) explicitly by drawing all the allowed 3-atom configurations.The matrix M is the so-called transfer matrix for this system. It can be shown that the number of configurations W = Tr[M N ]. max N→∞ (26) 1. So W = lim λN . Tr[M N ] ≈ λN . Verify W = Tr[M N ] for N = 1 and N = 2. Now for large N.

BC. 12 . calculate the positions of the Rayleigh. (29) N Problem: Using the classical theory of light scattering. one at 20000cm−1 − 992cm−1 = 19008cm−1 and one at 20000cm−1 − 3063cm−1 = 16937cm−1 .States like AAC are not allowed because A and C are neighbors. B. Solution: Since there are two vibrational modes we expect two Stokes lines to the red of 20000cm−1 . For part (d) we use S k k k = ln W = lim ln λN = lim N ln λmax = k ln λmax . and C. we simply need to find the maximum eigenvalue of the Transfer matrix. BB. ⎤⎤ ⎡⎡ ⎤⎤ ⎤⎡ ⎡⎡ 2 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ ⎥⎥ ⎥⎢ ⎢⎢ W = Tr[M 2 ] = Tr ⎣⎣ 1 1 1 ⎦ ⎣ 1 1 1 ⎦⎦ = Tr ⎣⎣ 2 3 2 ⎦⎦ = 7 (27) 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 This corresponds to the seven distinguishable microstates AA. Stokes and anti-Stokes spectral lines for benzene. There is only one Rayleigh line and it is at the same frequency at the input laser beam which. For N = 1. Using √ Mathematica we find λmax = 1 + 2. CB and CC (Remember C and A cannot be neighbors). in this case. For part (c) we evaluate W = Tr[M N ] for N = 1 and 2. max N→∞ N N→∞ N N N (28) So. Likewise we expect two anti-Stokes lines. W = Tr[M] = 3 This corresponds to the three distinguishable microstates A. Therefore the limiting entropy per atom is ³ √ ´ S = k ln 1 + 2 . For N = 2. is 20000cm−1 . AB. BA. Assume benzene has only two active modes (992cm −1 and 3063cm −1 ) and assume the Laser light used to do the scattering is at 20000cm −1 (this is 500nm–green light). one at 20000cm−1 + 992cm−1 = 20992cm−1 and one at 20000cm−1 + 3063cm−1 = 23063cm−1 .

Solution: The equation representing a Berthelot gas is P = nRT n2 a − .Problem: A simple model for a crystal is a “gas” of harmonic oscillators. S. (33) ∂β 2 2 Problem: Express the equation of state for internal energy for a Berthelot gas. (35) dU = ∂T V ∂V T 13 . V ). A = −kT ln Qcrystal = +NKT ln 2 sinh 2 (31) where we used properties of logs to pull the N out front and move the sinh term from to the numerator. V − nb T V 2 (34) We are interesting in an equation of state for U(T. Writing out the total derivative of U(T. Ã ! 1 N Qcrystal = qHO = (30) 2 sinh β~ω 2 From our formulas for statistical thermodynamics ¶ µ β~ω . S = −kβ ∂Qcrystal + k ln Qcrystal ∂β µ ¶ β~ω β~ω Nkβ~ω coth − k ln 2 sinh = 2 2 2 U =− (32) and N~ω β~ω ∂Qcrystal = coth . Solution: For this model the crystal is modelled as a collection of harmonic oscillators so we need the partition function for the harmonic oscillator. and U from the partition function for this model. V ) we get ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂U ∂U dT + dV. Determine A.

One obtains ¶ µ ¶ µ n2 a n2 a ∂P nRT nR 2n2 a + 2 2 − + T −P =T = . We employ the “useful relation” µ ¶ ¶ µ ∂U ∂P =T −P (36) ∂V T ∂T V to eliminate U in favor of P so that we can use the equation of state for a Berthelot gas. Cp = Cv − T ∂T P ∂V T (41) 14 . (37) ∂T V V − nb T V V − nb T V 2 TV 2 Hence the equation of state for internal energy of a Berthelot gas is dU = CV dT + 2n2 a dV TV 2 ¡ ∂P ¢ (38) Problem: Use the identities for partial derivatives to eliminate the in ¶ µ ¶ µ ∂P ∂V Cp = Cv + T ∂T P ∂T V so that all derivatives are at constant pressure or temperature. but ∂V T is nothing convenient so we must ∂T proceed.¡ ¢ ¡ ∂U ¢ Now ∂U V is just heat capacity. CV . ¶2 µ ¶ µ ∂P ∂V . ∂T V factor (39) Solution: Here we either remember an identity or turn to our handout of partial ¡ ¢ derivative identities to employ the cyclic rule to ∂P V : ∂T µ ∂P ∂T ¶ V ∂P =− ∂V µ ¶ µ T ∂V ∂T ¶ . (40) P This eliminates the constant V term and so.

Part I Basic Quantum Mechanics 15 15 .

1. Black body radiation and the ultraviolet catastrophe 16 16 .1.1. Atomic spectral lines 4. experiments were being performed in which the results defied explanation by means of the current understanding of physics. Among these experiments were 1. • Many phenomena described by minimal and general concepts. Low temperature heat capacity 3. Quantum Theory The goal of science is unification. The “Fall” of Classical Physics A good theory: • explain known experimental results • self consistent • predictive • minimal number of postulates Around the turn of the century. The photoelectric effect 2.

1. Flaws of the solar system model • Newton: OK √ √ • Maxwell: problem 17 . The Stern-Gerlach experiment ∗ ∗ See Handouts ∗ ∗ 1. • The electron orbits the nucleus with the attractive coulomb force balanced by the repulsive centrifugal force.2. The two slit experiment 6.5. First Attempts at the Structure of the Atom The “solar system” model. Bohr’s Atomic Theory 1.2.

The atom collapses! Bohr’s model: Niels Bohr (1885—1962) 18 .— As the electron orbits the nucleus. — The system is not stable and the electron spirals into the nucleus. the atom acts as an oscillating dipole • — The classical theory of electromagnetism states that oscillating dipoles emit radiation and thereby lose energy.

e. me e2 The total energy of the Bohr atom is related to its quantum number µ 2 ¶ e 1 2 . N is a positive real integer called the quantum number. • Therefore atomic orbitals must be quantized.52918 Å and is called the Bohr radius. ~ = h/2π is Planck’s constant divided by 2π. me and e are the mass and charge of the electron respectively and 0 is the permittivity of free space. 2 The constant quantity 4π e0e~ appears often and is given the special symbol a0 ≡ m 2 4π 0 ~2 = 0.3) Eionize = E∞ − E1 = 2a0 ∞2 1 2a0 (1.1) Zme e2 where Z is the atomic number. r= 4π 0 N 2 ~2 (1. N = 1 → N = ∞ µ ¶ 1 e2 −Z 2 e2 1 − 2 = (1.2) 19 . EN = −Z 2a0 N 2 Tests of the Bohr atom • Ionization energy of Hydrogen atoms — The Ionization energy for Hydrogen atoms (Z = 1) is the minium energy required to completely remove an electron form it ground state. i. • If the orbital radius was continuous the gas would have a continuous spectrum..• Atoms don’t collapse =⇒ what are the consequences Experimental clues • Atomic gases have discrete spectral lines.

7.· · · 4.· · · Series Name Lyman Balmer Pachen Brackett Pfund (1.· · · 6.6. — Doing this results in the emission or absorption of a photon with energy v= ˜ 4E hc (1.5. the atom may only change its orbital radius by discrete amounts.667 cm−1 = R.605 eV (very good agreement) • Spectroscopic lines from Hydrogen represent the difference in energy between the quantum states — Bohr theory: Difference energies µ ¶ µ ¶ 1 1 e2 1 1 Ej − Ek = − 2 =R − 2 2a0 Nj2 Nk Nj2 Nk Initial state Nk 1 2 3 4 5 • Final States Nj 2.7. 2 — Eionize experimentally observed from spectroscopy is 13.3.4) — Since the orbitals are quantized.6.5) Failure of the Bohr model • No fine structure predicted (electron-electron coupling) • No hyperfine structure predicted (electron-nucleus coupling) • No Zeeman effect predicted (response of spectrum to magnetic field) 20 .606 eV = 109.4. R is called the Rydberg constant.e — Eionize = 2a0 = 13.· · · 5.5.4.· · · 3.8.

9 Laidler&Meiser ∗ ∗∗ The must be continuous and single valued Particles have wave-like characteristics The Bohr atom was an important step towards the formulation of quantum theory • Erwin Schrödinger (1887—1961): Wave mechanics • Werner Heisenberg (1902—1976): Matrix mechanics • Paul Dirac (1902—1984): Abstract vector space approach 21 . The wave must satisfy periodic boundary conditions much like a vibrating ring ∗ ∗ ∗ See Fig.• Spin is not included in theory The Bohr quantization idea points to a wavelike behavior for the electron. 11.

1. y and y +dy and z and z +dz is |ψ(x. z) at the position between x and x+dx.2. z) and. That is. x. be a function of momentum. z) Note: In general the wavefunction need not be expressed as a function of coordinate. Postulate I Postulate I: The state of a system is defined by a wavefunction. y. we will most often deal with time independent “stationary” states ψ(x. in fact. represents a probability distribution which is directly observable. y. ψ. y. φ)|2 r2 sin θdrdθdφ in spherical coordinates). The wavefunction ψ represents a probability amplitude and is not directly observable. The Postulates of Quantum Mechanics 2. the probability of finding a particle which is described by ψ(x. ψ∗ ψ = |ψ|2 . θ. which contains all the information that can be known about the system. 22 22 . We will normally take ψ to be a complex valued function of time and coordinates: ψ(t. z)|2 dxdydz (or |ψ(r. for example. y. It may. However the mod-square of the wavefunction.

1) Now. z)|2 dxdydz < ∞ Normalization of the wavefunction In order for |ψ(x. z)|2 to be exactly interpreted as a probability distribution. y. y. where N = |ψunnorm (x. ψ(x.Properties of the wavefunction • Single valueness • continuous and finite • continuous and finite first derivative R • space |ψ(x. (2. qR That is. How to normalize a wavefunction If we have some unnormalized wavefunction.2. z) must be normalizable. y.2) space space 23 . ψunnorm we know that this function must simply be some constant N multiplied by the normalized version of this function: ψ unnorm = Nψnorm . 2. z)|2 dxdydz space R This assures that space |ψnorm |2 dxdydz = 1 as expected for a probability distribution From now on we will always normalize our wavefunctions. y. ψ unnorm = Nψnorm . (2. we take the mod-square of both sides and then integrate both sides of this equation over all space Z Z 2 |ψunnorm | dxdydz = |Nψnorm |2 dxdydz.

Postulates II and II Postulate II: Every physical observable is represented by a linear (Hermitian) operator. y.5) space Z space |ψnorm |2 dxdydz = 1 (2. (2. Taking the square root of both sides gives.3. (2. 24 . N unnorm (2.6) So finally we get the normalized wavefunction by reagranging ψ unnorm = Nψnorm : ψ norm = 1 ψ . sZ N= space |ψunnorm (x. z)|2 dxdydz. To find the probability for the particle to be in a finite region of space we simple evaluate (here a 1D case) R x2 Z x2 |ψ(x)|2 dx if ψ(x) x1 P (x1 < x < x2 ) = R ∞ =⇒ |ψ(x)|2 dx (2.but The N is just a constant so it can be pulled out of both the mod-square and the integral Z Z 2 2 |ψunnorm | dxdydz = N |ψnorm |2 dxdydz. So. Thus wherever R we see space |ψnorm |2 dxdydz we can replace it with 1.4) This gives us an expression for N.8) 2 normalized x |ψ(x)| dx 1 −∞ 2. Z |ψunnorm |2 dxdydz = N 2 × 1 = N 2 .3) space space because that is the very definition of a normalized wavefunction. therefore this is a general procedure that will work for any wavefunction. (2.7) Notice that no where did we ever specify what ψunnorm or ψnorm actually were.

z) and coordinate systems (spherical. For a given operator only a special set of function satisfy this equation.An operator takes a function and turns it into another function ˆ Of (x) = g(x) (2. Postulate III: The measurement of a physical observable will give a result that is one of the eigenvalues of the corresponding operator. There is a special operator equation called the eigenvalue equation which is ˆ Of (x) = λf (x) where λ is just a number. These functions are called eigenfunctions.).10) 25 .9) This is just like how a function takes a number and turns it into another number. cylindrical. Nearly all operators we will need are algebraic combinations of the above. (2. etc. So in quantum mechanics operators act on the wavefunction to produce a new wavefunction The two most important operators as far as we are concerned are • x=x ˆ ∂ • px = −i~ ∂x ˆ and of course the analogous operators for the other coordinates (y.

The number that goes with each function is called the eigenvalue. So solution of the eigenvalue equation gives a set of eigenfunctions and a set of eigenvalues. So we want a solution to ˆ df (x) = λf (x) df (x) = λf (x) dx (2. Example ˆ ˆ Let O in the eignevalue equation be the operator that takes the derivative: O = ˆ d d = dx .11) So. So the eigenfunctions are the set of functions f (x) = eλx and the eigenvalues are the numbers λ 26 . we ask ourselves what function is proportional to its own derivative? ⇒ f (x) = eλx .

3. This equation is the (time independent) Schrödinger equation. 1. The Setup of a Quantum Mechanical Problem 3.2. The Quantum Mechanical Problem Nearly every problem one is faced with in elementary quantum mechanics is handled by the same procedure as given in the following steps. 27 27 . (3. The eigenvalue equation for the Hamiltonian is ˆ Hψ = Eψ. The operator associated with the total energy is called the Hamiltonian operator ˆ (or simply the Hamiltonian) and is given the symbol H. This equation is the most important equation of the course and we will use it many times throughout our discussion of quantum mechanics and statistical mechanics.1) 3. Define the classical Hamiltonian for the system. The Hamiltonian The most important physical observable is that of the total energy E.1.

y . z) − E) ψ = 0 (3. ˆ T = 2m 2m (3. z) H =T +V = 2m (3.2) (3.6) ˆ V = V (ˆ..7) ˆ 3. z ) = V (x. 2 2 ˆ −~ ∇2 = −~ ∇2 . z) ψ = Eψ 2m −~2 2 ∇ ψ + (V (x.• The total energy for a classical system is Ecl = T + V. x. Use Postulate II to replace the classical variables. with their appropriate operators. px etc. y.8) ⇒ 2m 28 . y. −~2 2 ˆ ˆ ˆ ∇ + V (x. x ˆ ˆ So. where T is the kinetic energy and V is the potential energy. z) (3. ∂z 2 and (3. y. 2. y. y. Solve the Schrödinger equation. Thus.3) • The potential energy is almost always a function of coordinates only V = V (x.4) • Note: Some quantum systems don’t have classical analogs so the Hamiltonian operator must be hypothesized.5) where ∇2 ≡ ∂2 ∂x2 + ∂2 ∂y2 + ∂2 . which is now a second order differential equation of the form ¸ ∙ 2 −~ 2 ∇ + V (x. Hψ = Eψ. z). • The kinetic energy is always of the form T = ¢ 1 ¡ 2 px + p2 + p2 y z 2m (3.

or average. then all measurements of that physical property will yield the associated eigenvalue. • For one-dimensional problems −~2 d2 ψ + (V (x) − E) ψ = 0 2m dx2 (3. The Average Value Theorem Postulate III implies that if ψ is an eigenfunction of a particular operator representing a physical observable. then all measurements of that physical property will still yield an eigenvalue. hˆi = x and hˆx i = p Z Z ψ xψdxdydz = ˆ ∗ space Z space x |ψ|2 dxdydz ψ∗ ∂ψ dxdydz ∂x (3. however.3. However.12) space 29 .• Note: It is solely the form of V (x.10) space For example. but we cannot predict for certain which one. z) which determines whether this is easy or hard to do.9) 3. value for the measurement. If ψ is not an eigenfunction of a particular operator. give an expectation. This is given by Z hˆ i = α ψ∗ αψdxdydz ˆ (3.11) space ψ px ψdxdydz = −i~ ˆ ∗ Z (3. We can. y.

we can 2 know. α. The general statement of the Heisenberg uncertainty principle is 1 ¯Dh ˆ iE¯ ¯ ¯ δαδβ ≥ ¯ α.13) 2 h i ˆ means the commutator of α and β. ¯ 2i ¯ 2 (3. Such variables are called complimentary.. what can we say about its momentum? 30 .3. even in principle. β ˆ ˆ defined as h i ˆ ≡ αβ − β α. at the very best we can only hope to simultaneously know position and momentum such that the product of the uncertainty in each is ~ .) Suppose we know the position of a particle perfectly.4. β ¯ .b. The commutator is ˆ where the notation α. We see δpx δx ≥ 1 1 |h[ˆx . β ˆ ˆˆ ˆˆ (3. be simultaneously known to arbitrary precision. x]i| = |hˆx x − xpx i| p ˆ p ˆ ˆˆ 2 ¯Z 2 ¯ µ ¶ ¯ 1¯ ¯ ψ ∗ ~ ∂ x − x ∂ ψdx¯ = ¯ 2¯ i ∂x ∂x ¯ ¯ ¯~¯ ~ = ¯ ¯= .14) The most important example of complimentary variables is position and momentum. for example. ˆ (3. (n. This idea is the Heisenberg uncertainty principle and is of profound importance. δpx δy = 0.15) So. the y position and the x momentum to arbitrary precision. The Heisenberg Uncertainty Principle In quantum mechanics certain pairs of variables can not.

as a consequence. 4. V (x).1. It also can be used as a “zeroth order” model for certain physical systems. we need to partition the x-axis into the three regions shown in the figure. The 1D Particle in a Box Problem Consider the potential. Nevertheless it is of great pedagogical and practical value.4. we must violate one of our criteria for a good wavefunction. Particle in a Box We now will apply the general program for solving a quantum mechanical problem to our first system: the particle in a box. This system is very simple which is one reason for beginning with it. ⎪ ⎩ ∞ x≥a (4. We shall soon see that the particle in a box is a physically unrealistic system and. shown in the figure and given by ⎧ x≤0 ⎪ ∞ ⎨ V (x) = 0 0<x<a .1) Because of the infinities at x = 0 and x = a. 31 31 .

Now. ψ must equal zero in these regions. The Schrödinger equation in region II is (V (x) = 0) 2 2 ˆ = Eψ =⇒ −~ d ψ(x) = Eψ. in region I and III.): ψ(0) = 0 and ψ(a) = 0. Therefore it must satisfy the boundary conditions (b.4) Now ψ must be continuous for all x. ~2 (4. The particle must be found only in region II.3) (4.c. where the potential is infinite. dx2 ~ The general solution of this differential equation is ψ(x) = A sin kx + B cos kx.2) which can be rearranged into the form d2 ψ(x) 2mE + 2 ψ(x) = 0. Hψ 2m dx2 (4. the particle can never exist so. where k = q 2mE . 32 .

nπ . n = 1.8) 33 . · · · . So we are left with ψ(x) = A sin kx for our wavefunction.6) The constant A is the normalization constant. we see that the constant B must be zero because cos kx|x=0 = 1. places certain restrictions on k.5) (4. ψn (x)ψ n (x) = 1 = A2 sin a a −∞ 0 Letting u = πx . ψn (x) = A sin a kn = (4. As can be inferred from the following figure. 2..7) du = π dx. ψ(a) = 0. So.c. a The values of k are quantized. the second b.c. a (4. We obtain A from Z ∞ Z a nπx nπx ∗ sin dx. this becomes a Z π π A2 a a/ 2a = .From the ψ(0) = 0 b. 3. In particular. 1=A sin2 nudu = A2 π 0 2 / 2 π (4. now we have nπx .

11) 4. Implications of the Particle in a Box problem Zero Point Energy 34 .10) We can get the energy levels from kn = En = and kn = nπ : a h n2 π 2 ~2 ~= 2π n2 h2 = . a in a box are I II III .9) Is this wavefunction OK? Thus our normalized wavefunctions for a particle ⎧ ⎪ 0 ⎪ q ⎨ 2 ψn (x) = sin nπx a ⎪ a ⎪ ⎩ 0 q 2mEn ~2 (4. (4. 2ma2 8ma2 (4.Solving for A gives A= r 2 .2.

the lowest energy state.12) That is. 8ma2 (4. has nonzero energy. or ground state. If the energy was zero then we would conclude that momentum was exactly zero. δˆδp = 0 which violates the uncertainty principle. x Hence. But we also know that the particle is located within a finite region of ˆ space. δ p = 0.The smallest value for n is 1 which corresponds to an energy of E1 = h2 6= 0.13) h2 8ma2 • This spacing increases linearly with quantum level n • This spacing decreases with increasing mass • This spacing decreases with increasing a • It is this level spacing that is what is measured experimentally The Curvature of the Wavefunction 35 . so δˆ 6= ∞. This residual energy is called the zero point energy and is a consequence of the uncertainty principle. x ˆ Features of the Particle in a Box Energy Levels • The energy level spacing is 4E = En+1 − En = 4E = (2n + 1) (n + 1)2 h2 n2 h2 h2 − = (n2 + 2n + 1 − n2 ) / / 8ma2 8ma2 8ma2 (4.

ˆ The operator for kinetic energy is T = −~ 2 d2 . 2m dx2 The important part of this is d2 . the wavefunction is less confined and so the curvature does not need to be as great to satisfy the boundary conditions. • We know the wavefunction is zero in regions I and III. • As a is increased. This is an important concept for the qualitative understanding of wavefunctions for any quantum system. We also know that the wave function is not zero everywhere. The particle in a box problem illustrates some of the many strange features of quantum mechanics. We have already seen such nonclassical behavior as quantized energy and zero point energy. Therefore it must do something between x = 0 and x = a.14) ψ2 (x)xψ 2 (x)dx = x sin2 [ x]dx = a 0 a 2 −∞ 36 . It must have some curvature and hence some zero point energy. Applying this idea to the particle in a box we an anticipate both zero point energy and the behavior of the energy levels with increasing a. As another example consider the expectation value of position for a particle in the second quantum level: Z ∞ Z a 2 a 2π ∗ hxi = (4. dx2 From freshman calculus we know that the second derivative of a function describes its curvature so. a wavefunction with more curvature will have a larger second derivative and hence it will posses more kinetic energy. Therefore the energy levels decrease in energy as does their difference.

yet the probability of finding the particle at x = a is zero: ψ2 ( a ) = 0. There is 2 2 a a node at x = 2 . So even though the particle may be found anywhere else in the box and it may get from the left side of the node to the right side. it can never be found at the node. 37 .

The classical example is a ball on a spring The harmonic oscillator is arguably the single most important model in all of physics. The Harmonic Oscillator The harmonic oscillator model which is simply a mass undergoing simple harmonic motion. where k is the spring constant and Req is the equilibrium position of the ball. We shall begin by reviewing the classical harmonic oscillator and than we will turn our attention to the quantum oscillator.5. The force exerted by the spring in the above figure is F = −k(R − Req ). 38 38 . Setting x = R − Req we can measure the displacement about the equilibrium position.

so in going to the quantum oscillator. q k m (5. we need to express the force of the spring in terms of potential energy V .5) This differential equation is not easy to solve (you can wait to solve it in graduate school). Thus V = 1 kx2 . This can be rearrange into the form −~2 d2 ψ + 2m dx2 1 ⎜ −~2 d2 ⎟ ˆ Hψ = Eψ ⇒ ⎝ + kx2 ⎠ ψ = Eψ. 2 By postulate III the Schrödinger equation becomes ⎛ ⎞ K. 39 .2) and A and B are constants which are determined by the initial For quantum mechanics it is much more convenient to talk about energy rather than forces. (5. P.3) 2 Since energy is on an arbitrary scale we can set C = 0. we get dt 2 d2 x k d2 x m 2 = −kx ⇒ 2 + x = 0 dt dt m (5. 2 2 |2m dx } | {z } {z µ ¶ 1 2 kx − E ψ = 0 2 (5.4) (5.E.1) This is second order differential equation which we already know the solutions to: x = A sin ωt + B cos ωt. where ω = conditions.E.x From Newton’s law of motion F = ma = m d 2 . We know Z 1 V = − F dx = kx2 + C.

8) q k m and is called the vibrational constant. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Fig. An = p √ .6) x. 2 where ν 0 = 1 2π (5. 11.7) Note the energy levels are often written as 1 En = (n + )hν 0 . The eigenvalues (the energy levels) are 1 En = (n + )~ω.1. y = (5.The equation is very close to the form of a know differential equation called Hermite’s differential equation the solutions of which are called the Hermite polynominals.12 Laidler&Meiser ∗ ∗∗ 5. Interesting Aspects of the Quantum Harmonic Oscillator It is interesting to investigate some of the unintuitive properties of the oscillator as we have gone quantum mechanical 40 . As it turns out. m (5. 2 where again ω = q k . 2 ~ 2n n! π where An is the normalization constant for the nth eigenfunction and Hn (y) are the Hermite polynomials. the solutions (the eigenfunctions) to the Schrödinger equation for the harmonic oscillator are ¶1 µ 2 km 4 1 − y2 ψn (y) = An Hn (y)e .

• The probability distribution |ψ|2 becomes more and more like what is expected for the classical oscillator when v → ∞. — This is a manifestation of the correspondence principle which states that for large quantum numbers. 2 • Just like for the particle in a box. — On the other hand. Interpretation of the wavefunctions and energy levels 41 . • It is a consequence of uncertainty principle — If the ground state energy was really zero. • The wavefunctions penetrate into the region where the classical particle is forbidden to go — The wavefunction is nonzero past the classical turning point. Consider the ground state (the lowest energy level) • There is residual energy in the ground state because 1 E0 = (0 + )~ω. the quantum system must behave like a classical system. then we would conclude that the momentum of the oscillator was zero. this energy is called the zero point energy. δx = 0. Consider the wavefunctions. so δpδx = 0 Not allowed! — The uncertainty principle forces there to be some residual zero point energy. In other words the quantum mechanics must contain classical mechanics as a limit. we would conclude the particle was located at the bottom of the potential well (at x = 0) — Thus we would have δp = 0.1. 3. 2.

These specific values correspond to the energy level difference between the initial and final states.2. Experiments involving electromagnetic radiation—matter interaction are called spectroscopies. 5.• Remember the wavefunctions are time independent and the energy levels are stationary • If a molecule is in a particular vibrational state it is NOT vibrating. Atoms and molecules absorb or emit light only at specific (quantized) energies. Spectroscopy (An Introduction) The primary method of measuring the energy levels of a material is through the use of electromagnetic radiation. 42 .

ˆ Hψ = Eψ. This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material. sZ N= space |ψunnorm (x)|2 dx. The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations. see above for 3D).11) 43 43 . Equations • The short cut for getting the normalization constant (1D.10) • The Schrödinger equation (which should be posted on your refrigerator). The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets.9) • The normalized wavefunction: ψ norm = 1 ψ . (5. N unnorm (5.Key Equations for Exam 1 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 1. (5.

12) (5.14) • Normalized wavefunctions for the 1D particle in a box.18) where An is the normalization constant for the nth eigenfunction and Hn (y) are the Hermite polynomials.16) • The energy level spacing for the 1D particle in a box. ˆ hˆ i = α space (5. ∂x (5. a a • The energy levels for the 1D particle in a box. −~2 d2 ψ + (V (x) − E) ψ = 0. En = h n2 π 2 ~2 ~= 2π n2 h2 = . 4E = (2n + 1) h2 8ma2 (5. r • The energy levels are 1 En = (n + )~ω.• The Schrödinger equation for 1D problems as a differential equation.17) • The wavefunctions for the harmonic oscillator are ¶1 µ 2 km 4 1 − y2 x. y = √ . Z ψ∗ αψdx. ω = 2 k m (5. 2m dx2 • How to get the average value for some property (1D version).15) (5. 2 n n! π ~ 2 (5.13) • The momentum operator px = −i~ ˆ ∂ . An = p ψn (y) = An Hn (y)e . r nπx 2 ψn (x) = sin . 2ma2 8ma2 (5.19) 44 .

Part II Quantum Mechanics of Atoms and Molecules 45 45 .

Hydrogenic systems Hydrogenic systems are those atomic systems which consist of a nucleus and one electron. Hydrogenic Systems Now that we have developed the formalism of quantum theory and have discussed several important systems. we move onto the quantum mechanical treatment of atoms. 6. Hydrogen is the only atom for which we can exactly solve the Schrödinger equation for. So this will be the first atomic system we discuss. These system are centrosymmetric. The Schrödinger equation for all the other atoms on the periodic table must be solved by approximate methods.6. The Hydrogen atom (one proton and one electron) is the obvious example Ions such as He+ and Li2+ are also hydrogenic systems. The obvious choice for the coordinate system is to use spherical polar coordinates 46 46 .1. That is they are completely symmetric about the nucleus.

(4π 0 )r (6.6) Since the Hamiltonian is the sum of two terms.1) −Ze2 −~2 ˆ 2 ˆ .5) −~2 ˆ Hang = 2me (6. ∇ + H= 2me (4π 0 )ˆ r (6.2) Schrödinger’s equation (in spherical polar coordinates) becomes ˆ Eψ = Hψ (6. (6. ψ(r. θ. ψ must be a product state.8) (6. φ) = Eψang (θ.7) 47 . φ) = ψrad (r)ψang (θ. φ) It turns out that solving the Schrödinger equation.4) (6. r ˆ Hrad and ¸ ∙ Ze2 −~2 1 ∂ 2 ∂ r − = 2me r2 ∂r ∂r (4π 0 )r µ ∂ 1 ∂2 1 ∂ sin θ + sin θ ∂θ ∂θ sin2 θ ∂φ2 ¶ (6. The classical potential energy for these hydrogenic systems is V (r) = So the Hamiltonian is −Ze2 .3) ¶ µ 2 2 −Ze −~ ˆ 2 ψ ∇ + Eψ = 2me (4π 0 )ˆ r µ 2∙ ¶ µ ¶¸ −~ 1 ∂ 2 ∂ 1 ∂ 1 ∂2 1 ∂ −Ze2 Eψ = r + sin θ + ψ + 2me r2 ∂r ∂r r2 sin θ ∂θ ∂θ sin2 θ ∂φ2 (4π 0 )r The Hamiltonian is (almost) the sum of a radial part (only a function of r) and an angular part (only a function of θ and φ): 1 ˆ ˆ ˆ H = Hrad + 2 Hang . ˆ Hang ψang (θ.with the origin located on the nucleus. φ).

(Mathematica knows them and you can use them just like any other built-in function like sine or cosine. φ)’s are the spherical harmonic functions characterized by quantum numbers l and m.) We shall use the spherical harmonics more next semester when we develop the quantum theory of angular momentum. θ.yields ψ ang (θ.9) where the Ylm (θ. φ) = ER(r)Ylm (θ. 2me (6. φ). φ) = ER(r)Ylm (θ. φ) H 2me r2 (6. φ) = Eψ(r.10) (6. θ. r ˆ Operating with Hang we get ¶ µ 2 ˆ rad + l(l + 1)~ R(r)Ylm (θ. φ) Hang ψang (θ. φ).12) (6. φ) = ER(r)Ylm (θ. The spherical harmonics are known functions. (6. φ) = 2me Now let’s denote the radial part of the wavefunction as ψ rad (r) = R(r). φ) ˆ HR(r)Ylm (θ.13) 48 . ˆ It also turns out that the energy associated with Hang is found to be E = El = So. The full Schrödinger equation becomes ˆ Hψ(r. φ) = Ylm (θ. φ) ¶ µ 1 ˆ ˆ Hrad + 2 Hang R(r)Ylm (θ.11) l(l + 1)~2 . l(l + 1)~2 ˆ ψang (θ.

Anl . the total wavefunction that describes a hydrogenic system (ignoring the spin of the electron.. θ. Also Note: the energy levels are the same as for the Bohr model.The Ylm (θ. n In fact.15) e Ln+1 n n where the normalization constant.18) 6. (6. (6.2.14) 2me r2 ∂r ∂r 4π 0 r r2 This differential equation is very similar to a known equation called Laguerre’s differential equation which has as solutions the Laguerre polynomials Ll (x).17) Note: The energy levels are determined by n alone–l drops out. depends on the n and l quantum numbers as sµ ¶3 2Z (n − l − 1)! Anl = − (6. which will be briefly discussed later) is ψ nlm (r. Discussion of the Wavefunctions We are now very close to having the atomic orbitals familiar from freshman chemistry.16) na0 2n[(n + l)!]3 The energy eigenvalues. φ) can now be cancelled to leave a one dimensional differential equation: µ ¶ Ze2 l(l + 1) −~2 1 ∂ 2 ∂ r − − R(r) = ER(r). φ) = Rnl (r)Ylm (θ. the energy levels are given by En = − Z 2R n2 (6. µ ¶l µ ¶ 2σ 2σ −σ/n 2l+1 Rnl (σ) = Anl . So. the solutions to our differential equation are closely related to the Laguerre polynomials. i. φ) (6. 49 .e.

So one needs to form linear combinations of these orbitals such that these combinations are pure real. The table below lists the atomic orbitals in the “chemists” picture as linear combinations of the “physicists” picture wave functions. 50 . ψ 3d0 are pure real and so these are the same in the “chemists” picture as in the “physicists” picture. The wavefunctions that chemists like are pure real. ψ 2s . ψ 2p0 . The atomic orbital you are used to from freshman chemistry are the “chemists” picture of atomic orbitals In the above table ψ1s .We have explicitly derived the “physicists” picture of the atomic orbitals orbital n l 1s 2s 2p 3d 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 m 0 0 0 ±1 0 ±1 ±2 wavefunctions (σ = r/a0 ) ψ1s = ψ100 = e−σ ¡ ¢ ψ2s = ψ200 = 1 − σ e−σ/2 2 ψ2p0 = ψ210 = σe−σ/2 cos θ ψ2p±1 = ψ21±1 = σe−σ/2 sin θe±iφ ψ3d0 = ψ320 = σ2 e−σ/3 (3 cos2 θ − 1) ψ3d±1 = ψ32±1 = R32 (r) cos θ sin θe±iφ ψ3d±2 = ψ32±2 = R32 (r) sin2 θe±i2φ The wavefunctions in the “physicists” picture are complex (they have real and imaginary components).

orbital n l 1s 2s 2p 1 2 2 2 2 3d 3 3 3 3 0 0 1 1 m 0 0 0 ±1 wavefunctions (σ = r/a0 ) 6. Spin of the electron ψ3dz2 = ψ3d0 £ ¤ 1 2 ±1 ψ3dxz = √2 ψ3d1 + ψ3d−1 £ ¤ 1 2 ±1 ψ3dyz = i√2 ψ3d1 − ψ3d−1 £ ¤ 1 2 ±2 ψ3dxy = √2 ψ3d2 + ψ3d−2 £ ¤ 1 ψ3dx2 −y2 = i√2 ψ3d2 − ψ3d−2 2 0 ψ1s = ψ1s ψ2s = ψ2s ψpz = ψ2p0 £ ¤ 1 ψ2px = √2 ψ2p1 + ψ2p−1 £ ¤ 1 1 ±1 ψ2py = i√2 ψ2p1 − ψ2p−1 As we know from freshman chemistry. Spin is actually rather peculiar so we will put off a more detailed discussion until next semester. so we can not write down an explicit function of the coordinate space variables.3. The spin wavefunction is a function in spin space not the usual coordinate space. For now we must be satisfied with the following: • There are two quantum numbers associated with spin: s and ms • s is the spin quantum number and for an electron s = 1/2 (always). electrons also posses an intrinsic quantity called spin. • ms is the spin orientation quantum number and ms = ±1/2 for electrons. 51 .

n.m χs. When a particular spin state is needed a further notation is commonly used: α ≡ χ 1 . (6.20) n2 where recall.3. can take on values of 1.− 1 (the “spin-down” state) 2 2 2 2 6. — The principle quantum number.2. Again note that for a free hydrogenic system the total energy depends only on the principle quantum number n.ms = Rnl (r)Yl. It also determines the atomic sub-shells (6.l.ms and “tack it on” as another factor of the complete wavefunction.m.4. En = − The quantum numbers of the hydrogenic system • The principle quantum number.19) 52 .ms = ψn.s.l. φ)χ The energy is given by Z 2R . n: determines the total energy of the systems and the atomic shells. . Summary: the Complete Hydrogenic Wavefunction We are now in position to fully describe all properties of hydrogenic systems (except for relativistic effects) The full wave function is Ψn. . l: determines the total angular momentum of the system. 1 (the “spin-up” state) and β ≡ χ 1 .m (θ. • The angular momentum quantum numbers.We simply denote the spin wavefunction generally as χs.

. can take on values of 0. l = 2 is called d. .— The angular momentum quantum number. . — For electrons s = 1/2. We have determined all that we can about the hydrogen atom within Schrödinger’s theory of quantum mechanics. — For electrons ms = ±1/2 We have accomplished quite a bit. • The spin orientation quantum number. s: determines the total spin angular momentum. l = 1 is called p. . • The orientation quantum number. This is not the full story however. l = 3 is called f etc. Dirac. ms : determines the projection of the spin angular momentum onto the z-axis (i. (n − 1) — For historical reasons l = 0 is called s. ± l. . in the late 1920’s. spin-up or spin-down).e. l.. 1. ±1. It also determines the orientation of the atomic sub-shells — The magnetic quantum number. We also had to add spin in an ad hoc manner to account for what we know experimentally–spin did not fall out of the theory naturally. m: determine the projection of the angular momentum onto the z-axis. m. The Schrödinger theory is a non-relativistic one. can take on values of 0. that is. • The spin quantum number. it can not account for relativistic effects which show up in spectral data. His theory also made the 53 . . developed a relativistic quantum theory in which the well established phenomenon of spin arose naturally.

54 . In 1948 Richard Feynman developed the beginnings of quantum electrodynamics (QED). so we limit ourselves to the non-relativistic Schrödinger theory. The Dirac theory was still not fully complete.bold prediction of the existence anti-matter that has now been verified time and again. QED is the best theory ever developed in terms of matching with experimental data. because there still existed experimental phenomena that was not properly described. Both the relativistic Dirac theory and QED are beyond our reach.

E of electron 2 P. for example. Multi-electron atoms 7.1. The electron—electron repulsion term is responsible for the difficulty of the problem.7. In fact. repulsion where r12 = |r1 − r2 | is the distance between the electrons.E of electron 1 P.E of electron 1 K.—elec. It makes a closed form solution impossible. Although the extension from hydrogen to helium seems simple it is actually extremely complicated. (7. The Hamiltonian for helium is ~2 2 ˆ H= − ∇ 2me 1 | {z } ~2 2 − ∇ 2me 2 | {z } Ze2 − 4π r | {z 0 1 } Ze2 − + 4π 0 r2 | {z } e2 4π 0 r | {z 12 } .1) K. The helium atom is an example of the “three-body-problem”–difficult to handle even in classical mechanics–one can not get a closed form solution.E of eletcron 2 elec. helium. The problem must be solved by one of the following methods • Numerical solutions (we will not discuss this) 55 55 . Two Electron Atoms: Helium We now consider a system consisting of two electrons and a nucleus. it is so complicated that it can’t be solved exactly.

.. ⎨ ψ(1. The Pauli Exclusion Principle Electron are fundamentally indistinguishable.• Perturbation theory (next semester) • Variational theory (next semester) • Ignore the electron—electron repulsion (good for qualitative work only) 7. 2) = or ⎪ ⎩ −ψ(2. helium 56 . Now. photons): The total wavefunction for bosons must be symmetric under exchange of indistinguishable bosons.g.2) antisymmetric The Pauli exclusion principle states: The total wavefunctions for fermions (e. 1). All this implies that ⎧ ⎪ +ψ(2. 1 and 2 must be exactly the same as when the electrons are labelled 2 and 1. They can not truly be labelled. 1) symmetric (7. electrons) must be antisymmetric under the exchange of indistinguishable fermions.2. Let us consider the two electron atom.g. All physical properties of a system where we have labelled the electrons as. only |ψ|2 is directly measurable–not ψ itself. say. Note: a similar statement exists for bosons (e.

| {z }| {z } spatial part spin part (7. (7. but the spin part is neither symmetric or antisymmetric. Now let’s blindly list all possibilities for the ground state wave function of helium Ψa = ψ1s (1)α(1)ψ1s (2)α(2) Ψb = ψ1s (1)α(1)ψ1s (2)β(2) Ψc = ψ1s (1)β(1)ψ1s (2)α(2) Ψd = ψ1s (1)β(1)ψ1s (2)β(2) These appear to be four reasonable ground state wavefunctions which would imply a four-fold degeneracy. Since we are doing this. Likewise if the spatial part is odd then the spin part must be even.4) where the single particle wavefunctions are that of the hydrogenic system. we may as well simplify matters and use product state wavefunctions (products of the hydrogenic wavefunctions). Ψ = ψ(1)ψ(2)χ(1)χ(2). So.3) Since a complete solution for helium is not possible we must use approximate wavefunctions. one must make an antisymmetric linear combination of the spin parts. However considering the symmetry with respect to exchange we see the following • Ψa has symmetric spatial and spin parts and is there for symmetric. • Similarly for Ψd . It must be excluded. The Pauli exclusion principle implies that if the spatial part is even with respect to exchange then the spin part must be odd. 2)χ(1.5) 57 . 2) (7.The total wavefunction is Ψ = ψ(1. • Ψb and Ψc have symmetric spatial parts.

. Consequences of the Pauli exclusion principle • No two electrons can have the same five quantum numbers • Electrons occupying that same subshell must have opposite spins (7. . . . . . .3.7) (7. Many Electron Atoms The remaining atoms on the periodic table are handled in a manner similar to helium. The aufbau principle states that the ground state wavefunction is built-up of hydrogenic wavefunctions To arrive at an antisymmetric wavefunction we construct the Slater determinant: ¯ ¯ ¯ ψ (1)α(1) ψ1s (1)β(1) · · · ψn (1)α(1) ψn (1)β(1) ¯ ¯ 1s ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ψ1s (2)α(2) ψ1s (2)β(2) · · · ψn (2)α(2) ψn (2)β(2) ¯ ¯ Ψ=¯ (7. .The appropriate linear combination is α(1)β(2) − α(2)β(1). The product wavefunction for the ground state is determined by applying the aufbau principle. . So the ground state wave function for helium is Ψg = ψ1s (1)ψ1s (2) [α(1)β(2) − α(2)β(1)] . ¯ ¯ . . . . ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ψ (N)α(N) ψ (N)β(N) ψn (N )α(N) ψn (N)β(N) ¯ 1s 1s 58 .6) 7. .8) . Namely the wavefunction is product state that must be antisymmeterized in accordance with the Pauli exclusion principle.

This agrees with the Puli exclusion principle.The reason one can be sure that this wavefunction is the antisymmeterized is that we know from linear algebra that the determinant is antisymmetric under exchange of rows (corresponds to exchanging two electrons). The Total Hamiltonian The total Hamiltonian for a many electron (ignoring spin-orbit coupling which will be discussed next semester) atom is " # N X −~2 X e2 Ze2 ˆ ∇2 − + (7.9) (7. Another property of the determinant is that if two rows are the same (corresponds to two electrons in the same state) the determinant is zero. ψ1s β.3.1. It is also antisymmetric under exchange of columns.10) • The short hand notation for these states is (1s)2 (2s)1 7.11) H= 2me i 4π 0 ri j>i 4π 0 rij i=1 59 . • We construct the Slater determinant as ¯ ¯ ¯ ψ (1)α(1) ψ (1)β(1) ψ (1)α(1) ¯ 1s 1s 2s ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Ψ1 = ¯ ψ1s (2)α(2) ψ1s (2)β(2) ψ2s (2)α(2) ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ψ (3)α(3) ψ (3)β(3) ψ (3)α(3) ¯ 1s 1s 2s or ¯ ¯ ¯ ψ (1)α(1) ψ (1)β(1) ψ (1)β(1) ¯ 1s 2s ¯ ¯ 1s ¯ ¯ Ψ2 = ¯ ψ1s (2)α(2) ψ1s (2)β(2) ψ2s (2)β(2) ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ψ (3)α(3) ψ (3)β(3) ψ (3)β(3) ¯ 1s 1s 2s (7. and ψ2s α (or ψ 2s β). As an example consider lithium: • There are three electrons so we need three hydrogenic wavefunctions: ψ1s α.

This chapter will be limited to diatomic molecules. we are able to begin the discussion of molecules. 60 60 . Diatomic Molecules and the Born Oppenheimer Approximation Now that we have applied quantum mechanics to atoms. θ.1. φ) which describe the position of the nuclei relative to the center of mass. This leaves three degrees of freedom (R. Three of these describe the center of mass position. R determines the internuclear separation and θ and φ determine the orientation. 3n of these describe the position of the n electrons. Molecular Energy A diatomic molecule with n electrons requires that 3n+6 coordinates be specified. 8.8.

ˆ TN is the nuclear kinetic energy operator and is given by 2 2 ~2 ˆ2 ∂ ˆ2 ∂ ˆN ˆN = − ~ ∇2 = − ~ + J . + ZB e2 4π 0 rBi P ˆ VNe = − i P ˆ Vee = i>j h ZA e2 4π 0 rAi i is the nuclear—electron potential energy operator.8. e2 4π 0 rji is the electron—electron potential energy operator. ˆ VNN = ZA ZBe e2 4π 0 R is is the nuclear—nuclear potential energy operator. 61 . P ~2 ˆ 2 ˆ Te = i − 2me ∇ei is the kinetic energy operator for the electrons.2) m1 m2 m1 +m2 ˆ where J is angular momentum operator for molecular rotation and μ = the reduced mass of the diatomic molecule.1. R T 2μ 2μR2 ∂R ∂R 2μ (8.1.1) (8. The Hamiltonian In the center of mass coordinates the Hamiltonian for a diatomic molecule is ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ H = TN + Te + VN N + VNe + Vee .

8.1.2. The Born—Oppenheimer Approximation The Born—Oppenheimer approximation: The nuclei move much slower than the electrons. (classical picture) We put the Born—Oppenheimer approximation to work by first defining an effective Hamiltonian ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Hef f = Te + VN N + VNe + Vee . (8.3) The approximation comes in by treating R as a parameter rather than an operator (or variable). So one writes ˆ Hef f ψe (R, {ri }) = Ee (R)ψ e (R, {ri }). ψe is the so-called electronic wavefunction. Now the Schrödinger equation for the diatomic molecule is ³ ´ ˆ ˆ TN + Hef f ψ(R, {ri }) = Eψ(R, {ri }). (8.4)

(8.5)

Since the Hamiltonian is a sum of two terms, one can write the wavefunction ψ(R, {ri }) as a product wavefunction ψ = ψN ψe , (8.6)

where ψN is the so-called nuclear wavefunction. Substituting the product wavefunction into the Schrödinger equation gives ³ ´ ˆ ˆ (8.7) TN + Hef f ψN ψe = EψN ψe ³ ´ ˆ / / TN + Ee (R) ψ N ψe = EψN ψe ³ ´ ˆ TN + Ee (R) ψ N = EψN .

62

The last equation is exactly like a Schrödinger equation with a potential equal to Ee (R). One now models Ee (R) or determines it experimentally.

8.2. Molecular Vibrations
As stated earlier R is the internuclear separation and θ and φ determine the orientation. Consequently, R is the variable involved with vibration whereas θ and φ are involved with rotation. Considering only the R part of the Hamiltonian (under the Born—Oppenheimer approximation), we have ∙ 2 2 ¸ ~ ∂ − + Ee (R) ψvib = Evib ψvib . (8.8) 2μ ∂R2 It is convenient at this point to expand Ee (R) in a Taylor series about the equilibrium position, Req : ¶ µ ¶ µ ∂E 1 ∂2E 0 (R − Req ) + (R − Req )2 + · · · . (8.9) Ee (R) = E + 2 ∂R Req 2! ∂R Req Now E 0 is just a constant which, by choice of the zero of energy, can be set to an arbitrary value. Since we are at a minimum, One defines ³
∂2E ∂R2

´

¡ ∂E ¢

∂R Req

must be zero, so the linear term vanishes.

Req

≡ ke as the force constant.

The remaining terms in the expansion can collective be defined as O[(R−Req )3 ] ≡ Vanh , the anharmonic potential.

63

As a first approximation we can neglect the anharmonicity. With this, the Schrödinger equation becomes ∙ 2 2 ¸ ~ ∂ 1 2 − + ke (R − Req ) ψvib = Evib ψvib . (8.10) 2μ ∂R2 2 If we let x = (R − Req ) this becomes ¸ ∙ 2 2 1 ~ ∂ 2 + ke x ψvib = Evib ψvib , − 2μ ∂x2 2 which is exactly the harmonic oscillator equation. Hence √ 2 ψ vib,n = An Hn ( αx)e−αx /2 , where α ≡ And q q
ke μ . ~

(8.11)

(8.12)

1 Evib,n = hc˜ e (n + ), ω 2
ke . μ

(8.13)

where ω e ≡ ˜

1 2π

8.2.1. The Morse Oscillator Neglecting anharmonicity and using the harmonic oscillator approximation works well for low energies. However, it is a poor model for high energies. For high energies we need a more realistic potential–one that will allow of bond dissociation. The Morse potential Ee (R) = De [1 − e−β(R−Re q ) ]2 , (8.14)

64

μ where De is the well depth and β = 2πc˜ e 2De is the Morse parameter. Note: ω this expression for the Morse potential has the zero of energy at the bottom of the well (i.e. R = Req , ;Ee (Req ) = 0).

q

The Morse Potential can also be written as Ee (R) = De [e−2β(R−Req ) − 2e−β(R−Re q ) ]. (8.15)

Now the zero of energy is the dissociated state (i.e. R → ∞, ;Ee (R → ∞) = 0). We approach this quantum mechanical problem exactly like all the other. The Schrödinger equation is ¸ ∙ 2 2 ~ ∂ −β(R−Req ) 2 + De [1 − e ] ψvib = Evib ψvib − 2μ ∂R2

(8.16)

This is another differential equation that is difficult to solve.

As it turns out, this Schrödinger equation can be transformed into a one of a broad class of known differential equations called confluent hypergeometric equations– the solutions of which are the confluent hypergeometric functions, 1 F1 . Doing this yields the wavefunctions of the form ψvib,n (z) = z Apn e−z 1 F1 (−n, 1 + 2Apn , 2z), √ 2De μ −βx e , z = βh √ 2μ , A = βh p −1 − n pn = De + 2 A and energy levels of the form 1 1 Evib,n = −De + hc˜ e (n + ) − hc˜ e xe (n + )2 , ω ω 2 2 (8.17)

(8.18)

65

where ω e xe together is the anharmonicity constant, with xe = ˜ ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout ∗ ∗∗ 8.2.2. Vibrational Spectroscopy

hc˜ e ω . 4De

Infrared (IR) and Raman spectroscopy are the two most widely used techniques to probe vibrational levels. The spectral peaks appear at v = ˜
4E hc

(in units of wavenumbers, cm−1 ).

The transition from the n = 0 to the n = 1 state is called the fundamental transition. Transitions from n = 0 to n = 2, 3, 4 · · · are called overtone transitions. Transitions from n = 1 to 2, 3, 4 · · · , n = 2 to 3, 4, 5 · · · , etc. are called hot transitions (or hot bands) Since the energy levels depend on mass, isotopes will have a different transition energy and hence appear in a different place in the spectrum. Heavier isotopes have lower transition energies.

66

9. Molecular Orbital Theory and Symmetry
9.1. Molecular Orbital Theory
One of the most important concepts in all of chemistry is the chemical bond. In freshman chemistry we learn of one model for chemical bonding–VSEPR (valence shell electron-pair repulsion) theory, where hybridized atomic orbitals determine the bonding geometry of a given molecule. We are now prepared to discuss a bonding theory that is more rigorously based in quantum mechanics. Basically we will treat the molecules in the same way as all our other quantum mechanical problems (e.g., particle in a box, harmonic oscillator, etc.) As you might expect, it is not possible to obtain the exact wavefunctions and energy levels so, we must settle for approximate solutions. As a first example, let us consider the molecular hydrogen ion H+ . 2 The Hamiltonianfor H+ is 2 ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ H = TN + Tel + VNel + VNN 67
67

(9.1)

We use the Born-Oppenheimer approximation and treat the nuclear coordinates as a parameters rather than as variables. So we only worry about parts of the Hamiltonian that deal with the electron. The effective Hamiltonian becomes ˆ ˆ ˆ H = Tel + VNel e2 e2 −~2 2 ∇ − − . = 2me 4π 0 rA 4π 0 rB The eigenfunctions of this Hamiltonian are called molecular orbitals. The molecular orbitals are the analogues of the atomic orbitals. • Atomic orbitals: Hydrogen is the prototype and all other atomic orbitals are built from the hydrogen atomic orbitals. • Molecular orbitals: The hydrogen molecular ion is the prototype and all other molecular orbitals are built from the hydrogen molecular ion molecular orbitals. (9.2)

There is one significant difference between the above, which is the hydrogen atomic orbitals are exact whereas the hydrogen molecular ion molecular orbitals are not exact. In fact, we shall see that these molecular orbitals are constructed as linear combinations of atomic orbitals.

9.2. Symmetry
Let the atoms of the hydrogen molecular ion lie on the z-axis of the center of mass coordinate system.

68

y. −z) = aψ(x. z) = ψ(−x. −y. • If a = +1 the molecular wavefunction is even with respect to inversion and is called gerade and labelled with a “g”: ˆψ g = ψg ı • If a = −1 the molecular wavefunction is odd with respect to inversion and is called ungerade and labelled with a “u”: ˆψ u = −ψu ı • The terms gerade and ungerade apply only to systems that posses inversion symmetry. ı • Moreover the eigenvalue a can be either +1 or −1. −y. y. −z). z) must equal the electron density at (−x. That is ı ˆψ(x. ˆ. • Because of the symmetry the electron density at (x. (9. • The above symmetry therefore requires that the molecular orbitals be eigenfunctions of the inversion operator.3) Cylindrical symmetry 69 .Inversion symmetry • The potential field of the hydrogen molecular ion is cylindrically symmetric about the z-axis. y. z).

• The cylindrical symmetry implies that the potential energy can not depend on the φ. — We use λ to label the molecular orbitals as shown in the table λ 0 label σ ±1 ±2 · · · π δ ··· Mirror plane symmetry 70 . ±2. . ±1. . • The molecular wavefunction is described by an eigenvalue λ = 0. .

— If the eigenvalue is −1 (odd with respect to σ h ) the molecular orbital ˆ is called an antibonding orbital. ˆ • Thus the molecular wavefunction must be an eigenfunction of σ h with eigenˆ value ±1. 71 . • There are also vertical mirror plane symmetries.• There is also a symmetry about the x-y plane called horizontal mirror plane symmetry: operator σ h . but we will put that discussion off for the time being. — If the eigenvalue is +1 (even with respect to σ h ) the molecular orbital ˆ is called a bonding orbital.

We will discuss the approximation which models the molecular orbitals as linear combinations of atomic orbitals (LCAO). Useful can mean qualitatively useful or quantitatively useful.10. Unfortunately we can’t have both. LCAO is qualitatively very useful but it lacks quantitative precision. Molecular Orbital Diagrams 10. we need to find some useful approximations for them. Let us again consider the hydrogen molecular ion H+ : let one H atom be labelled 2 A and the other labelled B. Linear combination of the 1s atomic orbital from each H atom is used for the molecular orbital of H+ : 2 (1sA ) = ke−rA /a0 (10.1. LCAO–Linear Combinations of Atomic Orbitals Now that we know what symmetry the molecular orbitals must posses.1) and (1sB ) = ke−rB /a0 (10.2) 72 72 .

Φ+ represents a situation in which the electron density is concentrated between the nuclei and thus represents a bonding orbital.3) (10.1. But we shall also classify them according to their inversion symmetry and wether or not they are bonding or antibonding. For molecular orbitals we shall also classify them according to angular momentum.5) As can be seen from the above figure.4) (10.We construct two molecular orbitals as Φ+ = C+ (1sA + 1sB ) and Φ− = C− (1sA − 1sB ) The normalization condition is Z Φ± Φ± dΩ = 1 (10.1. Conversely Φ− represents a situation in which the electron density is very low between the nuclei and thus represents an antibonding orbital 10. Classification of Molecular Orbitals With atoms we classified atomic orbitals according to angular momentum. 73 .

2.. s ⇒ σ.. This molecules is a homonuclear diatomic with two electrons. σ g is a bonding orbital and σ ∗ is an antibonding u orbital.g.g. The classification according to bonding or antibonding is an asterisk is used to denote antibonding. pz ⇒ σ. The Hydrogen Molecule Let us now consider the hydrogen molecule. Those with m = ±1 form π type molecular orbitals. λ 0 orbital symbol σ ±1 ±2 · · · π δ ··· Atomic orbitals with m = 0 form σ type molecular orbitals. For example. σ g or σ u etc. The ground state of the system would consist of two separate hydrogen molecules in their ground atomic states: (1s)1 74 . e. e.The classification according to angular momentum is as follows. For example. If the two atoms are infinitely far apart. The classification according to inversion symmetry is simply a subscript “g” or “u”. px ⇒ π etc. 10.

u (10.6) 75 . These are σg = 1sA + 1sB and σ ∗ = 1sA − 1sB . their respective s orbitals begin to overlap.7) (10.As the atom are brought closer together. It is now more appropriate to speak in terms of molecular orbitals. so one forms linear combinations of the atomic orbitals. There are two acceptable linear combinations.

We will focus on the second row homonuclear diatomics and some simple heteronuclear diatomics. The molecular orbital diagram for H2 is shown below Molecular orbital diagrams can be drawn for any molecule. It is also to be expected since we know H2 is a stable molecule. Molecular Orbital Diagrams The energy levels associated with the molecular orbitals are drawn schematically is what is called a molecular orbital diagram. Some get very complicated. 76 . u We can intuit this qualitatively however since the σ ∗ orbital must have a node u whereas the σ g does not.It can be shown mathematically that the energy level associated with σg is lower than σ∗ .3. 10.

The supplement that follows this section contains some examples of heteronuclear diatomics.The molecular orbital diagrams for the second row homonuclear diatomics are rather simple. • Bond order is defined as BO = 1 (# of bonding electrons − # of antibonding electrons) 2 (10. 77 . ∗ ∗ ∗ See Supplement ∗ ∗∗ The supplement that follows this section contains examples for each of the second row diatomics. This disparity is not present for homonuclear diatomics. For example a high lying 1s orbital may combine with a low lying 2s orbital to form a σ molecular orbital. A consequence of this energy level disparity is that molecular orbitals may be formed from nonidentical atomic orbitals.8) • Examples follow in the supplement. Heteronuclear diatomics are some what more complicated since there is a disparity in the energy levels of the atomic orbitals for the separated atoms. Bond order • One important property that can be predicted from the molecular orbital diagrams is bond order.

9) ´ ³ ˆ ˆ ˆ Hele + Hvib + Hrot ψele ψvib ψrot = (Eele + Evib + Erot ) ψele ψvib ψrot 78 .4. The Complete Molecular Hamiltonian and Wavefunction We have discussed molecular vibrations which under the Born-Oppenheimer approximation are governed by the vibrational Hamiltonian and described by the vibrational wavefunction.10. We can succinctly express the Schrödinger equation for a molecule as follows. Next semester we will discuss molecular rotations and just like for vibrations and electronic transitions they are governed by the rotational Hamiltonian and described by the rotational wavefunction. (Next semester will we look at the details of this for polyatomic molecules) ˆ Hmol Ψmol = Emol Ψmol (10. Likewise we have discussed molecular orbitals which are the electronic wavefunctions.

11. The Classical Electrodynamics Treatment of Light Scattering As usual we work under the electric dipole approximation and only focus on the interaction of the electric field part of light with a dipole.11. An Aside: Light Scattering–Why the Sky is Blue This chapter addresses the topic of light scattering from two different perspectives. 79 79 .1) where α is the polarizability of the molecule describing the “flexibility” of its electron cloud. • Classical electrodynamics • Classical statistical mechanics Since this is not a course on electrodynamics.1. When the light interacts with the molecule an electric dipole is induced according to μ = αE. (11. we have to take several key results from that theory on faith.

In this case we see the dipole oscillates at three distinct frequencies: ω. (11. The first term corresponds to Rayleigh scattering where the scattered light is at the same frequency as the incident light. there is a vibrational (and rotational) contribution to the polarizability: α(t) = α0 + α1 cos ωv t (here for simplicity we assume only one vibrational mode). Thus the light—matter interaction is described as μ(t) = α(t)E(t) = (α0 + α1 cos ω v t) E0 cos ωt = α0 E0 cos ωt + α1 E0 cos ω v t cos ωt ⎡ ⎤ α1 E0 ⎣ cos(ω − ω v )t + cos(ω + ω v )t ⎦ = α0 E0 cos ωt + | {z } {z } | {z } | 2 Rayleigh Stokes Raman AntiStokes Raman (11. That is. The second term corresponds to Stokes Raman scattering where the scattered light is shifted to the red of the incident frequency.For light.2) The polarizability also depends on the positions of nuclei to some degree. the electric field part is E(t) = E0 cos ωt.3) (11. According to classical electrodynamics an oscillating dipole emits an electromagnetic field at the oscillation frequency. 80 . ω − ωv and ω + ω v as part of three terms in the above expression.4) where a trig identity was used in the last step.

This quartic scattering dependence is. the reason why the sky is blue (from the point of view of classical electrodynamics) and is called the Rayleigh scattering law. Classical electrodynamics can describe exactly how the oscillating electric dipole emits electromagnetic radiation. 81 . There is a very strong dependence on frequency (or wavelength). in fact.5) where μ0 = α0 E0 for the case of Rayleigh scattering and μ0 = α1 E0 /2 for the case of Raman scattering. 11. It can be shown that the emitted intensity is I= ω4 2 μ. 3c3 0 (11. The Blue Sky The spectrum of visible light from the sun incident on the outer atmosphere is essentially flat as shown below. The important point to note is that I ∝ ω 4 or alternatively I ∝ 1/λ4 .2.The third term corresponds to anti-Stokes Raman scattering where the scattered light is shifted to the blue of the incident frequency. To explicitly derive this expression we would need a fair bit of electrodynamics and so the derivation is not shown here.

We just learned that light scatters as it traverses the atmosphere according to Rayleigh’s scattering law: I(λ) ∝ 1/λ4 .1. 82 . The following figures illustrate why Rayleigh scattering implies that the sky is blue. 11. but red sunsets occur for the same reason– Rayleigh scattering. Sunsets We have focused on a blue sky.2.

This more pronounced at dawn or dusk since the light must traverse more of the atmosphere at those times then at noonday at which time the sun appears yellow in color.2.If we look directly at the sun during a sunset (or sunrise) it appears red because most of the blue light has scattered in other directions. 11. White Clouds We might expect that clouds should be highly colored since they consist of droplets of water which scatter light very effectively. 83 .2.

Mie scattering is referred to as Tyndall scattering 84 .The key difference between light scattering by clouds versus by the atmosphere is the size of the scatterer. In this limit an entirely different analysis is made–one does not have Rayleigh scattering but instead has a process called Mie scattering. In some contexts. The water droplets are much larger than the wavelenght of the light–quite the opposite case as above. particularly in liquid suspensions.

θ. Equations • The wavefunctions for the hydrogenic system are ψnlm (r. Rnl (σ) = Anl (11. depends on the n and l quantum numbers as sµ ¶3 2Z (n − l − 1)! Anl = − (11. φ) = Rnl (r)Ylm (θ. φ) • The radial part is. Anl .7) where the normalization constant.Key Equations for Exam 2 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 2.8) na0 2n[(n + l)!]3 85 85 . The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations.6) µ 2σ n ¶l e −σ/n 2l+1 Ln+1 µ 2σ n ¶ . This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material. (11. The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets.

e.14) 86 . (11. .9) • The wavefunctions for the harmonic oscillator are ¶1 µ 2 km 4 1 − y2 ψ n (y) = An Hn (y)e .11) Ee (R) = De [1 − e−β(R−Re q ) ]2 . 2 2 where ω e xe together is the anharmonicity constant.Ee (Req ) = 0).Ee (R → ∞) = 0). (11. • The Morse Potential can also be written as Ee (R) = De [e−2β(R−Req ) − 2e−β(R−Req ) ]. .10) where An is the normalization constant for the nth eigenfunction and Hn (y) are the Hermite polynomials. y = x. R → ∞. 2 n n! π ~ 2 (11. ω = 2 • The Morse potential is r k m (11. R = Req .e.n = −De + hc˜ e (n + ) − hc˜ e xe (n + )2 . • The energy levels for the Morse oscillator are of the form 1 1 ω ω Evib. with xe = ˜ hc˜ e ω . An = p √ .13) Now the zero of energy is the dissociated state (i. • The energy levels are 1 En = (n + )~ω.12) q μ where De is the well depth and β = 2πc˜ e 2De is the Morse parameter.• The energy levels for the hydrogenic system are given by En = − Z 2R n2 (11. ω Note: this expression for the Morse potential has the zero of energy at the bottom of the well (i. 4De (11.

• Bond order is defined as BO = 1 (# of bonding electrons − # of antibonding electrons) 2 (11.16) 87 .15) • The Rayleigh scattering law is I(λ) ∝ 1/λ4 ∝ ω 4 (11.

Part III Statistical Mechanics and The Laws of Thermodynamics 88 88 .

we use a very detailed theory. The systems are the same except that each one is in a different so-called microstate. It is simply impossible. quantum mechanics. say. to write down and solve the Schrödinger equation for those 100 million molecules.12. 89 89 . even with the fastest computers. So we need a less detailed theory called statistical mechanics. but often Avogadro’s number of molecules. Rudiments of Statistical Mechanics When we study simple systems like a single molecule. which allows one to handle macroscopic sized systems without losing to much of the rigor. at least 100 million molecules.1. most of the time in the real world we are dealing with macroscopic systems. 12. However. Statistics and Entropy Probability and statistics is at the heart of statistical mechanics. We will need some definitions • Ensemble: A large collection of equivalent macroscopic systems.

p) = N! . The number of possible configurations is defined as W..g. say.3) 90 . (12.1.1. 12.• Microstate: The single particular state of one member of the ensemble given by listing the individual states of each of the microscopic systems in the macroscopic state. Combinations and Permutations Consider a random system that when measured can appear in one of two outcomes (e. flipping coins).1) The number C(N. One valuable piece of statistical information about system is knowing how many different ways the system appears p times in. The Boltzmann equation is S = k ln W Where S is entropy and k is Boltzmann’s constant. p)xp . p!(N − p)! (12. This is given by the mathematical formula for combinations C(N. outcome 1 after N measurements. p) is also called the binomial coefficient because it gives the coefficient for the pth order term in the expansion (1 + x) = N N X p=0 C(N. Boltzmann developed an equation to connect the microscopic properties of an ensemble to the macroscopic properties.2) (12. • Configuration: The collection of all equivalent microstates.

This is given by W (N. 91 . we are interested in a particular permutation. Set x = 1 in the above. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Examples on Handout ∗ ∗∗ For both combinations and permutations we need to evaluated factorials. Sometimes the order is important.4) 2N = C(N. {Ni }) = N! N1 !N2 !N3 ! · · · (12. p) = N N 2 2 p!(N − p)! (12. This gives (1 + 1) N = N X p=0 N X p=0 C(N.6) where N is the total number of measurements and Ni is the number of indistinguishable results of type i. So rather than a particular combination. p). So the probability of any one outcome of N measurements is P (N.This formula will allow us to derive a normalization constant so that we can obtain the probability of obtaining p measurements of state 1. p) = 1 1 N! C(N.5) For combinations we did not care what order the results of the measurements occurred. p)(1)p (12.

• Sterling’s approximation is ln(N!) ' N ln N − N (12. So for example if N = 1024 then (12. but sometimes it is important. the value of a certain property fluctuates about the average value.2.8) σO 1 ≈√ .9) 1 √ N = 10−12 92 . Sterlings Approximation: • In place of evaluating factorials of large number one can use Sterling’s approximation to approximate the value of the factorial. The fluctuation about an average value for any observable property O is described by the variance which is defined as ¯ σ 2 ≡ O2 − O2 . ¯ O N where N is the number of particles.This is no problem for small numbers.7) 12. Consequently. we speak of the average value of the property. It can be shown that (12. Macroscopic equilibrium is a dynamic rather than static equilibrium. but when we consider macroscopic systems (1020 or so molecules) no calculator can handle factorials of such large numbers. Often this fluctuation is not important. Fluctuations When we list the macroscopic properties of a material such as a beaker of benzene or the air of the atmosphere. O σ O is consider the range of the observable property.

For ensembles having large numbers of particles measured values of a property are extremely sharply peaked about the average value. 93 .

(13.1) Ni (13. Since the system is isolated the total energy. The total energy is given by E= where Ni is the number of particles in energy state i.2) The number of configurations for the system is then given by the number of distinct permutations of the system W = N! . The total number of particles is. N= X i X i Ni i . N1 !N2 ! · · · (13.13. The Boltzmann Distribution Consider a isolated system of N molecules that has the set { i } energy levels associated with it. E. of course. 94 94 .3) A system in equilibrium always tries to maximize entropy and minimize energy and so the equilibrium configuration is a compromise between these two cases. and the total number of particles will be constant.

Minimizing energy would be the case where all the particles are in the ground state (say 1 ). This is done using the mathematical technique of Lagrange multipliers (page 951 of your calc book). We will not discuss this method in detail and consequently we cannot derive the equilibrium configuration. (13.For the moment let us relax the isolation constraint. 95 . E and number of particles N To determine the equilibrium configuration we must find the maximum W subject to the constraint of constant energy and constant number of particles.4) −β j j gj e | {z } pi where β ≡ 1 kT and gj denotes the degeneracy of states having energy j. This would be the situation in which every particle was in a different energy state. These two situations are contradictory and some compromise must be obtained. That is all Ni = 1 or 0. The derivation using Lagrange multipliers arrives at the configuration in which the gi e−β i Ni = N P . Maximizing entropy corresponds to maximizing W (via S = k ln W ). We start by considering our original system–that being one with constant energy.

. This partition function is not very useful to us so we will not discuss it further. The first is W –the number of configurations. A given energy E will correspond to a unique temperature T. 96 . Partition Functions We have already come across both the partition functions that we will use in this class.1. 13. nonisolated systems by considering T as a variable. β and hence T are constants.The pi represents the probability of finding the a randomly chosen particle or system which has energy i .6) and is called the canonical partition function. The second partition function is Q= X j gj e−βEj (13. This is the Boltzmann distribution gi e−β i Pi = P −β j gj e (13.e. This is called the microcanonical partition function.5) j Since we started with a isolated system. The analysis readily generalizes to variable energy i.

1.1. energy levels and temperature do not explicitly appear. Relation between the Q and W When we get to connecting quantum mechanics with thermodynamics it will prove convenient to use Boltzmann’s equation (S = k ln W ) but as was stated earlier it is not convenient to use the microcanonical partition function (W ). It is not an exact relation as we derive it. That is. In fact we have already seen this in the S = k ln W. In the following we give an argument which provides a relation between the partition functions.This was first encountered as the denominator of the Boltzmann distribution and it is extremely important in statistical mechanics.) The partition function is to statistical mechanics as the wavefunction is to quantum mechanics. but it is a very good approximation for large numbers of particles. We shall see in the next chapter that the partition function will provide a link between the microscopic (quantum mechanics or classical mechanics) and the macroscopic (thermodynamics). But this an inconvenient connection because. (Note: the symbol Z is also often used for the canonical partition function. for among other reasons. There are other partition functions that are useful in different situations but we will do nothing more than list two important ones here: i) the grand canonical partition function and ii) the isothermal—isobaric partition function 13. 97 . the partition function contains all that can be known about the ensemble.

The microcanonical partition function describes a system at fixed energy E. In fact W is the number of available states of the ensemble at the particular energy E. This is essentially the same as the degeneracy of the ensemble gE . Conversely the canonical partition function describes a system with variable energy. However, based on our previous discussion of fluctuations, even though the energy of the ensemble is allowed to vary, the number of states with energy equal to the ¯ average energy E is overwhelmingly large. That is, almost every state available ¯ to the ensemble has energy E. We can express these ideas mathematically to come up with a relation between W and Q. The canonical partition function is Q= but to a good approximation Q ' gE e−β E . ¯
¯

X
j

gj e−β j ,

(13.7)

(13.8)

Now since the degeneracy is essentially the microcanonical partition function we have ¯ (13.9) Q ' W e−β E . So the canonical partition function is a Boltzmann weighted version of the microcanonical partition function. We will soon make use of the Boltmann’s equation in terms of the canonical

98

partition function: ln Q ' ln(W e−β E ) = ln W + ln(e−β E ) ¯ E = ln W − | {z } kT .
S/k ¯ ¯

(13.10)

so,

S = k ln Q +

¯ E T

(13.11)

13.2. The Molecular Partition Function
We ended the previous chapter by stating the total molecular energy (about the center of mass) as = ele + vib + rot . (13.12) This is a consequence of the Born Oppenheimer approximation If we include the center of mass translational motion this is = The ith total energy level is
i ele

+

vib

+

rot

+

trans

(13.13)

=

ele,n

+

vib,v

+

rot,J

+

trans,m .

(13.14)

Now if we have a collection of molecules in a macroscopic system. A given configuration (say, configuration j) of that system has total energy Ej . So the canonical partition function is Q= X
j

gj e−βEj

(13.15)

99

But, each Ej is made up of the contributions of all of the molecules: Ej =
a l

+

b m

+

c n

+ ···

(13.16)

The partition function for the molecule is written as Q = = X
j

gj e−βEj = gla e−β {z
a l

X |l

qm o l,a

where the qmol,i are the molecular partition functions.

}|m

X

l,m,n···

a gm e−β qm o l,b

X {z

b c (gla gm gn · · · )e−β( l + m + n +··· )
a m

a

b

c

(13.17)

}| n {z

X

a gn e−β n · · ·

a

qm o l,c

}

The total canonical partition function is the product of the molecular partition functions. For the case where the molecules are the same then all the qmol,i are the same: qmol,i = qmol thus qN (13.18) Q = mol . N! This allows us to focus only on a single molecule: qmol = X
i

gi e−β i = gele,n e−β
qele

X |n

n,v,J,m
ele ,n

X }| v

n s,m ) gele,n gvib,v grot,J gtrans,m e−β ( ele,n + v ib ,v + ro t,J + tra(13.19)

{z

X

gvib,v e−β
qv ib

v ib ,v

{z

}| J

X

grot,J e−β
qro t

ro t,J

{z

}|m

X

gtrans,m e−β
qtra n s

tra n s,m

{z

}

We now collect below the expression for each of these partition functions. You will get the chance to derive each of these for your home work

100

The Translational Partition Function qtrans = where V Λ3 (13.20)

h Λ≡ √ 2πmkT is the thermal de Broglie wavelength. The Rotational Partition Function (linear molecules)

(13.21)

We will discuss rotations next semester. However, the high temperature limit, which works for all gases (of linear molecules) except H2 is T (13.22) qrot ≈ σθr
h where θr ≡ 8π2 Ik (I is the moment of inertia) and σ is the so-called symmetry number in which σ = 1 for unsymmetrical molecules and σ = 2 for symmetrical molecules.
2

The Vibrational Partition Function qvib e− 2 β~ω 1 = = −β~ω 1−e 2 sinh 1 β~ω 2
1

(13.23)

Note this is for the harmonic oscillator. At temperatures well below the dissociation energy this is a very good approximation. (You will derive this as a homework problem.) The Electronic Partition Function There is usually only a very few electronic states of interest. Only at exceedingly high temperatures does any state other that the ground state(s) become important

101

so qele =

X
i

gele,i e−β

tele ,i

≈ gele,ground

(13.24)

102

14. Statistical Thermodynamics
The partition function allows one to calculate ensemble averages which correspond to macroscopically measurable properties such as internal energy, free energy, entropy etc. In this chapter we will obtain expressions for internal energy, U, pressure, P, entropy, S, and Helmholtz free energy, A. With these quantities in hand we will, in the subsequent chapters, formally develop thermodynamics with no need to refer back to the partition function. Ensemble averages The ensemble average of any property is given by 1 X ¯ O= Oi gi e−β i . Q i Internal energy One critical property of an ensemble is the average (internal) energy U. 1 X −β i ¯ . U ≡E= i gi e Q i Let us look closer at the above expression. Recall that Q= X
i

(14.1)

(14.2)

gi e−β i .

(14.3)

103
103

Now take the derivative of Q with respect to β gives à #! " ¶ µ X µ ∂e−β i ¶ ∂ X −β i ∂Q = gi e = gi ∂β n,V ∂β i ∂β n,V i n,V X = − gi i e−β i
i

(14.4)

By comparing this to the expression for U, we see µ ¶ ¶ µ 1 ∂Q ∂ ln Q U =− =− , Q ∂β n,V ∂β n,V where we used the identity
1 ∂y y ∂x

(14.5)

=

∂ ln y . ∂x

Pressure Another important property is pressure. When the ensemble is in the particular state i, d temperature and number of particles ¶ µ ∂ i pi = − ∂V n,β
i

= −pi dV . So at constant (14.6)

Thus the ensemble average pressure is given by ¶ µ 1 X ∂ i P =p=− ¯ gi e−β i . Q i ∂V n,β Multiplying by β/β we get 1 X P =− gi βQ i Using the chain rule in reverse, i.e., ∂e−β ∂V z }| ¶ µ ¶ µ ¶ µ −β i { ∂ i ∂e ∂ i = =− βe−β ∂ i ∂V ∂V
−βe−β
i

(14.7)

µ

∂ i ∂V

βe−β i .

(14.8)

n,β

i

i

(14.9)

104

10) 105 .we proceed as ! Ã µ −β i ¶ ∂e 1 1 X ∂ X −β i P = gi = gi e βQ i ∂V βQ ∂V i n. It is S = U + k ln Q T µ ¶ ∂ ln Q = −kβ + k ln Q ∂β n. βQ ∂V n.β Entropy We have already obtained the expression for entropy.β n.β β ∂V n.β µ ¶ µ ¶ ∂Q 1 1 ∂ ln Q = = .11) (14.V (14.

The Helmholtz free energy has the most direct relation to the partition function as can be seen from µ ¶ ¶ µ ∂ ln Q ∂ ln Q A ≡ U − TS = − + kT β − kT ln Q (14.V = −kT ln Q Any thermodynamic property can now be obtained from the above functions as we shall see in the following chapters. We will make the distinction between the Helmholtz free energy and the more familiar Gibb’s free energy (G) later as well. That is. 106 .12) ∂β ∂β n.V n.Helmholtz Free Energy Free energy is the energy contained in the system which is available to do work. it is the energy of the system minus the energy that is “tied-up” in the random (unusable) thermal motion of the particle in the system: A ≡ U − T S Free energy is probably the key concept in thermodynamics and so we will discuss it in much greater detail later.

Thermodynamics is completely independent of the microscopic structure of the system. y): µ ¶ µ ¶ ∂z ∂z dz = dx + dy ∂x y ∂y x 2.1. Properties of Partial Derivatives Of critical importance in mastering thermodynamics is to become proficient with partial derivatives. 15. Summary of Relations 1. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout ∗ ∗∗ 15. The total derivative of z(x.15.1. The chain rule for partial derivatives: µ ¶ µ ¶ µ ¶ ∂u ∂z ∂z = ∂x y ∂u y ∂x y 107 107 (15. Thermodynamics is a theory describing the most general properties of macroscopic systems at equilibrium and the process of transferring between equilibrium states.1) (15.1.2) . Work We now begin the study of thermodynamics.

3) y 4. The reciprocal rule: µ µ ∂z ∂x ∂z ∂x ¶ µ y ∂x ∂z ¶ =1 ¶ (15.4) ¶ z 5. 108 . 15. Definitions System: a collection of particles Macroscopic systems: Systems containing a large number of particles. Finally µ ∂z ∂x ¶ = u µ + y µ ∂z ∂y ¶ µ x ∂y ∂x (15. Closed system: A system that cannot exchange matter with its environment but may exchange energy.3.5) u 15.2. The cyclic rule: ¶ y ∂z =− ∂y ∂z ∂x ¶ µ ¶ µ x ∂y ∂x (15.2. Microscopic systems: Systems containing a small number of particles. Types of Systems Isolated system: A system that cannot exchange matter or energy with its environment.1. Environment: Everything not included in the system (or set of systems) Note that the distinction between the system and the environment is arbitrary and is chosen as a matter of convenience.

2. pressure. • Heat is exchanged if only internal parameters are changed during the process.6) = specific heat. Adiabatic system: A closed system that also can not exchange heat energy with its environment.2. density. 109 . Extensive properties can be “converted” to intensive properties through ratios: Extensive property → Intensive property. Extensive property For example mass volume (15.Open system: A system that may exchange matter and energy with its environment. System Parameters Extensive parameters (or properties): properties that depend on the amount of matter. = density. heat capacity. • For example. volume. Intensive parameters (or properties): properties that are independent of the amount of matter. • For example. temperature. • Work is exchanged if external parameters are changed during the process. heat capacity mass 15. mass. 15. volume moles = molar volume.3. Work and Heat A system may exchange energy with its environment or another system in the form of work or heat.

8) Ai dai (15. Heat. F .1.. q. dx: dw = F dx.g. Generalized Forces and Displacements In physics you learned that an infinitesimal change in work is given by the product of force.. but the product of the two must have units of energy (e. which acts as ‘generalized displacement. Newtons) and the generalized displacement need not have units of position (e. 15. The infinitesimal amount of work done on the system is then given by dw = Ada. times and infinitesimal change in position.’ Note that the generalized force need not have units of force (e.Convention Work. Work is negative (w < 0) if work is done by the system. Joules).3. w. meters). A may be considered as a ‘generalized force’ which is coupled to a particular internal parameter..7) For thermodynamics. (15. is positive (q > 0) if heat is absorbed by the system.g. or more generally as dw = X i (15.g. we need a more general definition if infinitesimal work.9) 110 . is positive (w > 0) if work is done on the system. a. Heat is negative (q < 0) if heat is released from the system. Any given external parameter.

dQ Magnetization. E Magnetic Field. H Chemical Potential. When we get to applications of thermodynamics we will then be concerned with the various forms of work like those shown in the table above. this is called P V work. A Generalized Displacement. The following table gives some examples of generalized forces and displacements Generalized Force. γ Voltage. dh −P dV σdε γdA EdQ HdM μdn mgdh 15.2. dM Moles. (15.3. dA Charge. dn Height. P V work In principle all work is interchangeable so that without loss of generality we will develop the formal aspects of thermodynamics assuming all work is due to changes in volume under a given pressure. That is dw = −P dV. σ Surface tension. −P Stress. dV Strain. μ Gravity.if more than one set of parameters change. a Contribution to dw Pressure.10) Expanding Gases Consider the work done by a gas expanding in piston from volume V1 to V2 against some constant external pressure P = Pex (see figure) 111 . mg Volume. dε Surface area.

The force exerted on a gas by a piston is equal to the external pressure times the area of the piston: F = Pex A ⇒ Pex = F/A. This can be manipulated as Z x2 Z x2 Z V2 F w=− F dx = − Adx = − Pex dV (15.11) A |{z} x1 x1 |{z} V1 dV Pex If Pex is independent of V then Z Z V2 Pex dV = −Pex w=− V1 V2 V1 dV = −Pex 4V (15.12) 112 . Rx Recall from physics that work is the (path) integral over force: w = − x12 F dx.

Maximum Work and Reversible changes Now that we have learned about PV work we will consider the situation where the system does the maximum amount of work possible.1) 113 113 .16.1. 16. In the figure wA = − Z V2 V1 Patm dV = −Patm (V2 − V1 ) (16. Maximal Work: Reversible versus Irreversible changes The value of w depends on Pex during the entire expansion.

wrev = − Z V2 Pgas dV (16. where w1 = − and Z Vi (16. So. there is always an intermediate equilibrium throughout the expansion.3) w2 = − Vi Patm dV = −Patm (V2 − Vi ) (16. 114 . wrev = wmax .2) V1 Patm+2W dV = −Patm+2W (Vi − V1 ) Z V2 (16. That is. Namely Pgas = Pex .and wB = w1 + w2 . Thus wrev is the maximum possible work that can be done in an expansion.4) Hence it is clear that |wB | > |wA | . Now consider case in the figure below The expansion is reversible.5) V1 This is the limiting case of path B in the previous figure.

. To make an intensive property 1. dq amount of heat energy is transferred. divide by mass to get specific heat 1 cV = m We will discuss heat capacity more later.g.b.2. ¡ dq ¢ ¡ dq ¢ e. divide by the number of moles to get molar heat capacity µ ¶ 1 dq CV m (T ) = n dT V 2.8) (16.16. (16. Temperature is an intensive property and heat is an extensive property.6) (16. heat capacity is a function of T . heat is related to temperature through the heat capacity dq dT n. when the temperature of a substance having a heat capacity C(t) is changed by dT. The heat capacity also depends on the conditions during the temperature change. µ dq dT ¶ (16. it is not a constant.. CV (T ) = dT V and CP (T ) = dT P are not the same Heat capacity is an extensive property.9) V 115 .7) That is. However. Temperature is not the amount of heat. Heat Capacity Temperature and heat are different. C(T ) = From this equation dq = C(t)dT.

P ). P independent then heat capacity is a function of T and P .315 J K−1 mol−1 ) and n is the number of moles. Example 1: The Ideal Gas Law The equation of state for volume of an ideal gas is P V = nRT . C(T. T .12) 116 . (More complicated systems require more than two independent variables. The ideal gas equation of state can be expressed in terms of intensive variables only P Vm = RT . 16. n m V The equation of state can also be expressed in terms of density ρ = mass m/n) MP mP = .10) where R is the gas constant (8. (16.3. (16. e.) The functional dependence of any property on the two independent variables is an equation of state. so we will focus our development of thermodynamics on simple systems.. ρ= nRT RT (and molar (16. The state of a pure. homogeneous material (in the absence of external fields) is given by the values of any two intensive properties. Equations of State The macroscopic properties of matter are related to one another via a phenomenological equation of state.16.3. but behave in the same way as the more simple pure system.g.11) where Vm = V .1.

2.13) The parameter a attempts to account for the attractive forces among the particles The parameter b attempts to account for the repulsive forces among the particles b originates from hard sphere collisions (see figure): 117 . Example 2: The van der Waals Equation of State A more realistic equation of state was presented by van der Waals: P = nRT n2 a − 2.3.16. V − nb V (16.

Some other equations of state are • Berthelot • Dieterici n2 a a nRT RT − − = 2 2 V − nb T V Vm − b T Vm an a P = (16.17) 118 .In term of intensive variables P = a RT − 2.16) • Redlich-Kwang P = (16.14) 16. Vm − b Vm (16.3.15) RT e− RT Vm nRT e− RT V = P = V − nb Vm − b nRT n2 a a RT −√ −√ = V − nb Vm − b T V (V − nb) T Vm (Vm − b) (16.3. Other Equations of State The van der Waals equation of state is not the only one that has been proposed.

The temperature at which (for fixed V and n) the pressure is zero is defined as T =0K • T (Kelvin) = T (Celsius) + 273. 17. • Heat flows from high T to Low T. Temperature and the Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics Temperature tells us the direction of thermal energy (heat) flow. which deal with temperature and total energy respectively. Today we will cover the zeroth and first laws. Next time we will cover the second and third laws which both deal with entropy. Temperature scales • Celsius: A relative scale based on water (T = 0◦ C for melting ice and T = 100◦ C for boiling water) • Kelvin: An absolute temperature scale based on the ideal gas law. The Zeroth and First Laws of Thermodynamics Over the course of the next two lectures we will discuss the four core laws of thermodyanmics.1.15 119 119 .17.

15 K and P = 1 bar. C. (Vm (SATP) = 24. Thermal equilibrium: If two systems are in contact along a diathermic wall and no heat flows across the wall.Standard conditions • standard temperature and pressure (STP): T = 273.789 L/mol) Diathermic wall: A wall that allows heat to flow through it. is chosen as a thermometer then it will read the same temperature when it is in thermal contact along a diathermic wall with system A as when it is in thermal contact along a diathermic wall with system B. The zeroth law of thermodynamics • Mathematical statement: If TA = TB and TB = TC . (17. then TA = TC This the mathematical statement of transitivity • Verbal statement: If system A is in thermal equilibrium with system B and system B is in thermal equilibrium system C then system A is also in thermal equilibrium with system C. then the systems are in thermal equilibrium. Adiabatic wall: A wall the does not allow heat to flow through it.414 L/mol) • standard ambient temperature and pressure (SATP): T = 298. (Vm (STP) = 22.1) The zeroth law implies that if an arbitrary system.15 K and P = 1 atm. 120 .

The internal energy state function For characterizing the change in energy of a system.4) 121 . So for a system where all the work is P V work the first law becomes Z V2 4U = q − Pex dV V1 (17.2. one is concerned with the work done on the system (w) and the heat supplied to the system (q).2.. V (T. P )).g. The first law of thermodynamics: • Mathematical statement: or in differential form dU = dq + dw (17.17. 17. The value of the state function depends only on that given state and on no other possible state of the system. The energy of a system is called the internal energy (U) of the system. The First Law of Thermodynamics Definitions: • State: the state of a system is defined by specifying a minimum number in intensive variables • State Function: A function of the chosen independent variables that describes a property of the state (e.1.3) 4U = q + w (17.2) • Verbal statement: The change in internal energy of a system is equal to the amount of work done on the system plus the amount of heat provided to the system.

9) (17. V ) is µ ¶ ¶ µ ∂U ∂U dU = dT + dV ∂T V ∂V T Consider adding heat at a constant volume then ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂U ∂U dT + dV = dq − Pex dV.in differential form this is dU = dq − Pex dV (17. A useful relation (derivation to come) is ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂U ∂P =T −P ∂V T ∂T V Example: A van der Waals gas n2 a nRT − 2 ⇒ P = V − nb V µ ∂P ∂T ¶ = nR V − nb (17.10) V 122 . ¶ ¶ µ ∂U ∂U dq = CV dT = dq =⇒ = ∂T V ∂T V dT ¡ ¢ Hence the slope ∂U V is the heat capacity. The total differential of U (T. ∂T The other slope. the most convenient at this time are V and T.6) (17. U → U(T. ¡ ∂U ¢ ∂V T (17.8) .7) µ (17.5) Although U can be expressed as a function of any two state variables. V ). dU = ∂T V ∂V T So. is called the internal pressure (it has no standard symbol).

and P. Start with the total differential of U ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂U ∂U dT + dV dU = ∂T V ∂V T ¡ ∂U ¢ ¡ ¢ ¡ ¢ but ∂U V = CV and ∂V T = T ∂P V − P (useful relation).11) The equation of state for U : Express U in terms of T. 123 . V.so the useful relation becomes ¶ µ nRT nRT n2 a nR ∂U −P = − + 2 = T ∂V T V − nb V − nb V − nb V 2 na = + 2 V (17.12) (17. A useful approximation is 4U = CV 4T which is valid for i) heat capacity nearly constant over 4T and with no phase transitions.13) is the equation of state for U. Hence ∂T ∂T ¶ ∙ µ ¸ ∂P − P dV dU = CV dT + T ∂T V (17. ii) ideal gas or at constant volume.

Entropy and the Second Law of Thermodynamics We learned from statistical mechanics that entropy. Hence. S. the average energy of the system E is in fact what we call internal energy: ¯ U ≡ E. and T are state functions.18. U A 1 − = (U − A). Furthermore we derived the simple relation between the Helmholtz free energy and the canonical partition function as A = −kT ln Q. (18. T T T Since U. A.1) T ¯ Now. S is also a state function .1.3) 124 . The Second and Third Laws of Thermodynamics 18. S= So we may write dS = (18.2) 1 (dU − dA) T 124 (18. is a measure of the disorder of the system and is expressed via Boltzmann’s equation S = k ln W (where W is the micocanonical partition function) We expressed Boltzmann’s law in terms of the more convenient canonical partition function as ¯ E S = + k ln Q.

4) Note: An alternative approach to thermodynamics which makes no reference to molecules or statistical mechanics is to simply begin by defining entropy as dS ≡ dqrev T The principle of Clausius • “The entropy of an isolated system will always increase in a spontaneous process” • Mathematical statement: (dS)U. Then dS = 1 1 (dU − dwrev ) = (dqrev + dw rev − dw rev ) / / T T dqrev .V ≥ 0 For a general process: dU = dq − Pex dV For a reversible process Pex = P and dq = T dS so dU = T dS − P dV 125 . Recall the definition of Helmholtz free energy–the energy of the system available to do work. We learned previously that the maximum amount of work one can extract from the system is the work done during a reversible process. For now let us limit the discussion to reversible processes.for an isothermal process. Hence dA = dwrev . (Reversible process) = T (18.

Thus for any spontaneous process T dS ≥ dq. T. This is a mathematical statement of the second law of thermodynamics (18. • Case iii) P = Pex then (spontaneous) dV is zero so (P − Pex )dV is zero. dU = T dS − P dV holds for any process. For some dU.Since U. and V are state functions. S. T dS is not heat and −P dV is not work. • Case ii) P > Pex then (spontaneous) dV is positive so (P −Pex )dV is positive. dq − Pex dV = T dS − P dV ⇒ T dS = dq − Pex dV + P dV T dS = dq + (P − Pex ) dV • Case i) Pex > P then (spontaneous) dV is negative so (P −Pex )dV is positive.5) 126 . P. (see figure) T dS is heat and −P dV is work only for reversible processes. but in general.

1. dU = dq + dw = dq − Pex dV (18. 6. Spontaneous processes are irreversible in character.6) From our earlier discussion of heat capacity dq = CV dT (CV since constant volume). Work must be done to transfer heat from a cold to a hot reservoir.1. So. the second law has a number of equivalent statements 1. 3. T (18. The Third Law of Thermodynamics Consider the first law for a reversible change at constant volume. 2. Statements of the Second Law Unlike the first law.8) 127 . A cyclic process must transfer heat from a hot to cold reservoir if it is to convert heat into work. The entropy of the universe is increasing 5. dU = CV dT but also dU = T dS.18. 4. The entropy of an isolated system will always increase in a spontaneous process (the principle of Clausius) 18. A useful perpetual motion machine does not exist. So CV dT =⇒ 4S = dS = T Z T2 (18.2.7) T1 CV dT.

A very similar derivation can be done for a reversible change at constant pressure (we can not do it quite yet) to yield Z T2 CP dT (18. Alternative statement of the third law: Absolute zero is unattainable.11) Hence the mathematical statement of the third law is Z T2 CP S(T2 ) = dT + S0 T 0 (18.g. a microscopic point of view suggests S0 = 0 for perfect crystals of atoms or of totally symmetric molecules (e. O2 etc..2.1. To derive the mathematical statement of the third laws we starting with Z T2 CP dT (18.. S0 6= 0 for imperfect crystals and crystals of asymmetric molecules (e.g. However. Consider the heat capacity near T → 0. CO). For S0 to have significance CP T must be finite (not infinite) as T → 0.12) From a macroscopic point of view S0 is arbitrary. Thus CP → 0.10) 4S = T T1 now let T1 → 0 4S = S2 − S0 = Z T2 0 CP dT T (18. Ar. The Third Law Verbal statement The third law of thermodynamics permits the absolute measurement of entropy.9) 4S = T T1 18. 128 .).

In other words. That is at low temperatures heat capacity goes as the cube of the temperature.2. 18. a = CP m /T ∗3 . ∗ ∗ CP m . the ever present random fluctuations in energy provide the infinitesimal amount of heat and so you can never reach absolute zero corresponding to an average energy of zero. 129 . In view of what we have learned about fluctuations. (Debye) Postulate: CP m = aT 3 . Debye’s Law Heat capacity data only goes down so far.2.But CP = dq dT → 0 implies dT dq → ∞. So. So one needs a theoretical extrapolation down to T = 0. an infinitesimal amount of heat causes an infinite change in temperature. T ∗ are the lowest temperature data points.

if we see a picture of your PChem book in mint condition and we see a picture of your PChem book all battered and beaten. Thus the simple fact that you have an enormous number of particles induces a perceived asymmetry in time. Yet.3. We know which picture was taken first. Times Arrow ∗ CP C =aT 3 CP m dT P m = T T ∗3 0 ¯T ∗ ∗ ∗ CP m T 3 ¯ ¯ = CP m . the behavior of the macrosystem definitely changes if you replace t with −t.The molar entropy is Sm (T ) = = ∗ Z 18.13) 0 Entropy and the second law give a direction to time. Both Newton’s laws and Quantum dynamics (next semester) are the same if you replace t with −t. T ∗3 3 ¯ 3 0 T∗ Z T∗ T 2 dT (18. For example. 130 . The interesting thing is that each molecule in a macroscopic system obeys time invariant dynamics.

15) • The canonical partition function is Q= gj e−βEj (18. The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets.Key Equations for Exam 3 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 3.16) 131 131 . (18. This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material. The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations.14) (18. Equations • The Boltzmann equation is • The Boltzmann distribution : g e−β i P i −β j gj e X j j S = k ln W.

• The relation between the partition function and the molecular partition function is qN Q = mol .V n.19) 2πmkT is the thermal de Broglie wavelength.β = β ³ =− + k ln Q ¡ ∂ ln Q ¢ ∂V ³ ∂ ln Q ∂β ´ n.22) • The relations between the canonical partition function and the thermodynamics variables are Internal energy Entropy Helmholtz Free Energy A = −kT³ln Q ´ 1 U = −Q ∂Q ∂β S Pressure P n. • The Rotational Partition Function (linear molecules) is T qrot ≈ . 2 sinh 1 β~ω 2 (18.β 132 . σθr 2 (18.17) N! • The Translational Partition Function V qtrans = 3 (18. O= Q i (18.V ¡ ∂Q ¢ 1 1 = βQ ∂V n.20) h where θr ≡ 8π2 Ik (I is the moment of inertia) and σ is the so-called symmetry number in which σ = 1 for unsymmetrical molecules and σ = 2 for symmetrical molecules • The Vibrational Partition Function is qvib = 1 . (18.21) • The ensemble average of any property is given by 1 X ¯ Oi gi e−β i .V ´ ∂ ln Q = −kβ ∂β n.18) Λ where h Λ≡ √ (18.

(18.25) (18. Also. 3 (18. in differential form this is dU = dq − Pex dV.30) ∗ where CP m is the molar heat capacity at the lowest temperature for which there is data.24) 4U = q + w.28) 0 CP dT + S0 T (18.• P V work is • Heat capacity: • General forms of the first law: dw = −P dV.29) • Debye’s law for entropy at very low temperatures Sm (T ∗ ) = ∗ CP m . dU = T dS − P dV. 133 . dq = C(t)dT.27) (18. • The second law • The third law T dS ≥ dq.23) (18.26) (18. S(T2 ) = Z T2 (18.

Part IV Basics of Thermodynamics 134 134 .

and kinetics–topics we will encounter throughout the year. 135 135 . The Other Important State Functions of Thermodynamics As was the case in quantum mechanics. Consequently. electrochemistry. So far we have encountered two state functions which characterize the energy of a macroscopic system–the internal energy and. K.1. 19. here too is energy the key property with which to work. (which you are familiar with from general chemistry) serves are a common point which connects thermodynamics. Auxillary Functions and Maxwell Relations We have stated that thermodynamics as we are studying it deals with states in equilibrium or transitions between equilibrium states. The equilibrium constant for a thermodynamic process. briefly the Helmholtz free energy. the concept of equilibrium plays a key role in much of what we will discuss for the remainder of the year.19.

(T and V ) and (T and P ) The table below lists these state functions State function Internal Energy Enthalpy Helmholtz free energy Gibbs free energy Symbol Natural variables U H A G S S T T and V and P and V and P Definition H ≡ U + PV A ≡ U − TS G ≡ H − TS Units energy energy energy energy We consider each of these functions in turn 19.1) we say that the natural (most convenient) variables for the equation of state for U are S and V .From the first law as stated as dU = T dS − P dV (19. V ) Unfortunately S can not be directly measured and most often P is a more convenient variable than V Because of this fact. it is handy to define state functions which have different pairs of natural variables. This is U = U(S. so that no mater what situation arises we have convenient equations of state to work with. 136 . Enthalpy We want a state function whose natural variables are S and P Let us try the definition H ≡ U + P V. The other pairs of natural variables being (S and P ).2.

Since the process is adiabatic no heat energy can flow in to compensate for the work done and the gas cools. The total internal energy decreases. As Freshmen we learn this as 4H = qp . consider an reversibly expanding gas under constant pressure (dP = 0) and adiabatic (dq = 0) conditions. For example. but dU = T dS − P dV. So a change in enthalpy is the change in internal energy adjusted for the P V work done.3.3) Enthalpy is the total energy of the system minus the pressure volume energy.2) / / dH = T dS − P dV + P dV + V dP = T dS + V dP.2.1.Now formally dH = dU + d(P V ) = dU + P dV + V dP. 19. so (19. The system does work during the expansion. If the process occurs at constant pressure then the enthalpy change is the heat given off or taken in. The enthalpy of the system on the other hand does not change–it is the internal energy adjusted by an amount of energy equal to the P V work done by the system. Helmholtz Free Energy Now we want a state function whose natural variables are T and V 137 . in doing so it must lose energy. Hence Enthalpy does indeed have the desired natural variables. 19. Heuristic definition: (19.

19.7) (19. 19. (19.6) 138 .3. but dU = T dS − P dV.4) / / dA = T dS − P dV − T dS − SdT = −P dV − SdT. Formally dA = dU − d(T S) = dU − T dS − SdT. Hence Gibbs free energy does indeed have the desired natural variables. but from above dH = T dS + V dP. so dG = T dS + V dP − T dS − SdT / / = V dP − SdT. Now formally dG = dH + d(T S) = dH − T dS − SdT. Gibbs Free Energy Finally we want a state function whose natural variables are T and P Let us try the definition G ≡ H − T S. so (19.5) Hence Helmholtz free energy does indeed have the desired natural variables.4. (19. Heuristic definition: As we have said before Helmholtz free energy is the energy of the system which is available to do work–It is the internal energy minus that energy which is “used up” by the random thermal motion of the molecules.Let us try the definition A ≡ U − T S.1.

11) CP = ∂T P So. 19. Use an identity of partial derivatives ∂T ∂T µ µ ∂U ∂T ¶ = P µ ∂U ∂T ¶ + V µ ∂U ∂V ¶ µ T ∂V ∂T ¶ (19.5.19. ¶ ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂ (U + P V ) ∂U ∂V CP = = +P (19.1. Heat Capacity of Gases 19.10) (19.1.5. The Relationship Between CP and CV To find how CP and CV are related we begin with dH = T dS + V dP at constant pressure and reversible conditions dH = T dS dH = dq but dq = CP dT (19.8) The constant pressure heat capcity can then be expressed in terms of enthalpy as ¶ µ ∂H . (19.4.13) P 139 .9) (19.12) ∂T ∂T P ∂T P P ¡ ¢ ¡ ¢ note ∂U P is not CV we need ∂U V . Heuristic definition: Gibbs free energy is the energy of the system which is available to do non P V work–It is the internal minus both that energy which is “used up” by the random thermal motion of the molecules and used up in doing the P V work.

The Maxwell Relations Summary of thermodynamic relations we’ve seen so far Definitions and relations: • H = U + PV 140 .18) 19.15) ∂P ∂T ¶ (19.17) ∂T P ∂T V nRT nR nR = nR = CV + T P V PV Thus CP = CV + nR or CP m = CV m + R (19.6.14) CP = ∂V T ∂T P ∂T P V ¶ ∙µ ¶ µ ¸ ∂U ∂V = CV + +P . Then ∂T µ ∂U ∂T µ CP = CV + Finally CP = CV + T µ ∂V ∂T ¶ ∙ µ ¶ ¸ ∂P T −P +P / / ∂T V P µ ∂V ∂T ¶ µ P ¶ (19.thus ¶ µ ¶ ¶ µ ∂V ∂U ∂V + +P (19. Ideal gas (equation of state: P V = nRT ): This equation is easily made explicit in either P or V so we don’t need any of the above replacements ¶ µ ¶ µ ∂P ∂V CP = CV + T (19.16) V Example: Ideal gases 1. ∂T P ∂V T ¡ ¢ ¡ ∂U ¢ Recall the expression for internal pressure ∂V T = T ∂P V − P .

• A = U − TS • G = H − TS • CV = ¡ ∂U ¢ ∂T V . (See handout and Homework) 141 . CP = ¡ ∂H ¢ ∂T P basic equations dU = T dS − P dV dH = T dS + V dP dA = −P dV − SdT dG = V dP − SdT Maxwell relations ¡ ∂T ¢ ¡ ¢ = − ∂P V ∂V S ¡ ∂T ¢ ¡ ∂S ¢ = ∂V P ∂P S ∂S ¡ ∂S ¢ ¡ ¢ = + ∂P V ∂V T ¡ ∂S ¢ ¡ ∂T ¢ = − ∂V P ∂P T ∂T working equations £ ¡ ¢ ¤ dU = CV dT + T ∂P V − P dV ∂T £ ¡ ¢ ¤ dH = CP dT − T ∂V P − V dP ∂T ¡ ¢ dS = CV dT + ∂P V dV T ¡ ∂T ¢ dS = CP dT − ∂V P dP T ∂T We will get plenty of practice with derivations based on these equations and on the properties of partial derivatives.

T dS ≥ dq for a spontaneous process. (dA)T.V ≤ 0 for a spontaneous process.V = 0. Spontaneity of processes Two factors drive spontaneous processes 1.1) (20. For chemistry it is most often more convenient to use Gibbs free energy The total differential of G is dG = dH − T dS − SdT = dq − Pex dV + P dV + V dP − T dS − SdT 142 142 (20.20.1. (dA)T.V = dq − T dS From the second law. Hence at equilibrium (dA)T.2) . The tendency to minimize energy 2. Chemical Potential 20. The tendency to maximize entropy Let us begin with Helmholtz free energy The total differential of A is (A = U − T S) dA = dU − T dS − SdT = dq − Pex dV − T dS − SdT For constant T and V.

Returning to the total differentials of free energy. The free energy functions are the workhorses of applied thermodynamics so we want to get a feel for them.4) Expressing dU and dH generally as dU = T dS − P dV and dH = T dS + V dP (remember that in general T dS cannot be identified with dq and P dV cannot be identified with −w). (20.P = 0.For constant T and P = Pex . Note free energy provides no information about how fast a process proceeds to equilibrium.P = dq − T dS Again from the second law.5) (20. So free energy provides a measure of the thermodynamic driving force towards equilibrium. Hence at equilibrium (dG)T. Plugging these into the total differentials of free energy gives dA = −SdT − P dV and dG = −SdT + V dP (20. (dG)T. T dS ≥ dq for a spontaneous process.P ≤ 0 for a spontaneous process.6) (20.3) 143 . dA = dU − T dS − SdT and dG = dH − T dS − SdT. (dG)T.

2.P = dq + w0 − T dS. Hence (dA)T = dwmax =⇒ (4A)T = wmax . Chemical potential What if the amount of substance can change? 144 . (dG)T. as stated earlier. As we have stated in words a number of times before. For reversible processes q = T dS and this becomes 0 0 (dG)T. but i) only P V work and ii) closed systems.These expressions are quite general. The total differential of G is also dG = dq + dw + P dV + V dP − T dS − SdT.8) (20.10) So. For a reversible process dq = T dS and work is maximal. For constant T and P = Pex .7) (20.9) (20. the Gibbs free energy is the energy of the system available to do non-P V work. In general dw = dw0 − Pex dV where dw0 is the non-P V work.P = wmax (20. The total differential of G becomes dG = dq + dw0 − Pex dV + P dV + V dP − T dS − SdT.P = dwmax =⇒ (4G)T. 20. The total differential of A is also dA = dq + dw − T dS − SdT.

n T.14) P.T 145 . • Physically. V.13) = −SdT − P dV + P dV + V dP + μdn / / / / = −SdT + V dP + μdn. this is a measure of the potential to change the amount of material. (20.Extensive properties depend on the amount of “stuff” For example A(T. n) and the total differential becomes µ ¶ ¶ µ µ ¶ ∂A ∂A ∂A dA(T. • This is a measure of the change in Helmholtz free energy of a system (at constant T and V ) with the change in the amount of material. | {z } =A ¡ ∂A ¢ ∂n V.12) dG = dA + P dV + V dP (20. • It defines the chemical potential μ ≡ So we can also write dA = −SdT − P dV + μdn What about the relation of the chemical potential to Gibbs’ free energy? G = H − T S = U − T S + P V = A + P V so.T . V ) now becomes A(T.T .n ∂n V.11) ∂T V. but from dG = µ ∂G ∂T ¶ dT + µ ∂G ∂P ¶ dP + µ ∂G ∂n ¶ dn (20. V.T Let’s focus on the slope ¡ ∂A ¢ ∂n V. n) = dT + dV + dn (20.n P.n ∂V T.

15) P. pressure.). The Gibbs free energy per mole (Gm ) for a pure substance is equal to the chemical potential. a solute is dissolved in a solvent. Activity and the Activity coefficient When. for example.3. and ζ ª is the value of ζ at the reference state. (20. (Gm = μ) 20. concentration etc. 146 .. Activity is hard to define in words and indeed it has an awkward mathematical definition as we will soon see. mole fraction. The mathematical definition of activity ai of some species i is implicitly stated as ζ→ζ lim ª ai =1 g(ζ) (20. there exist complicated interactions which cause deviations from ideal behavior.16) where g(ζ) is any reference function (e. μ is also a measure of the change in Gibbs free energy of a system (at constant T and P ) with the change in the amount of material and it still has the same physical meaning.T So.g.we see that μ= µ ∂G ∂n ¶ . To account for this one must introduce the concept of activity and the activity coefficient. The activity coefficient has a more convenient definition which is that it is the measure of how a particular real system deviates from some reference system which is usually taken to be ideal.

The choice of this state is completely up to us. That is. Let us consider the activity of a real gas for the above reference function and reference state. if we are talking about a gas we will mostly likely choose the ideal gas law in terms of pressure (P = nRT /V ) as our reference function and the reference state being when P = 0 since we know all gases behave ideally in the limit of zero pressure.17) 147 . Reference States Thermodynamics is founded on the concept of energy which we know to have an arbitrary scale. but it is often the case that the reference state is chosen to be some ideal state. Because of this it is always necessary to specify a reference state to which our real state can be compared. (20.1.3.This implicit definition is awkward so for convenience one defines the activity coefficient as the argument of the above limit. γi ≡ which we can rearrange as ai = γ i g(ζ). Note: the activity of gases as referenced to pressure has the special name fugacity (fugacity is a special case of activity). ai g(ζ) (20. For example. we can define are zero of energy any where we want.18) The definition of activity implies that γ i = 1 at g(ζ ª ) (the reference state) 20.

Our reference function is very simple: g(ζ) = ζ = P . Activity and the Chemical Potential One cannot measure absolute chemical potentials.20) Rather than referencing to the standard state one can also reference to any convenient “ideal” state. only relative potentials can be measured. i (20. This ideal state is in turn referenced to the standard state. μi − μª = RT ln ai .19) Thus the activity of our real gas is given by the activity coefficient times the pressure of an ideal gas under the same conditions.2. The deviation of the chemical potential at the state of interest versus at the reference state is determined by the activity at the current state (the activity at the reference state is unity by definition). i i i i i i (20. so γ= a ⇒ a = γP. Based on the condition that γ → 1 as we approach the reference state (P = 0 in this case) we see that the activity (or fugacity) of a real gas becomes equal to pressure for low pressures 20.22) 148 .3.21) i and for the ideal state μid = μª + RT ln aid ⇒ μª = μid − RT ln aid . By convention we chose a standard state and measure relative to that state. P (20. For the state of interest μi = μª + RT ln ai (20.

25) dμ = μª Pª P This gives P .Thus.24) Now we integrate from the reference state to the current state of interest Z Z RT id dP. μid → μª ). Lets say our gas is not ideal. (20.26) (20. μi = μid − RT ln aid + RT ln ai i i (20. so a = f for real gasses.27) For gases activity is usually called fugacity and given the symbol f . Starting from the begining dμ id dμid = Vm dP RT dP. (Note that as P → 1. so μid − μª = RT ln μid = μª + RT ln P.23) μi − μid = +RT ln ai − RT ln aid i i ai = RT ln id ai Example: Real and ideal gases at constant temperature. then at a given pressure μ = μª + RT ln a. but any pressure. dμid = P z}|{ = dGm = −Sm dT + Vm dP =0 (20.28) (20. (20.29) 149 . Thus μ = μª + RT ln f. (20. Pª The usual standard state is the ideal gas at P ª = 1.

P Example: The barometric equation for an ideal gas.30) and at elevation h z }| { μ (0) = μ + RT ln 1 = μª μid (h) = μª + RT ln Ph =0 (20.32) The gas fields the gravitational force which gives it a potential energy per mole of Mgh at height h. This is easily done by using μª = μid − RT ln P in the above equation for μ. μid = μª + RT ln P where we will take the reference state to be at sea level.Lets say that instead of referencing to the ideal gas at P = 1. 150 . we want to reference to the ideal gas at the current pressure P. P ª = 1 atm. So at sea level id ª (20.34) RT ln Ph = −Mgh Ph = e −M gh RT The last line is the barometric equation and it shows that pressure is exponentially decreasing function of altitude.e.31) (20. We add this energy per mole term to the chemical potential (which is free energy per mole) thus at equilibrium μid (0) = μid (h) + Mgh Referencing to the reference state we get ª ª μ/ = μ/ + RT ln Ph + Mgh (20. μ = μid − RT ln P + RT ln f f μ = μid + RT ln . i. We have an ideal gas so.33) (20.

Since A and B are in equilibrium their chemical potentials must be equal μA = μB Now. Ka .1) 151 151 . for this process. The quantity aB defines the equilibrium constant. Equilibrium First let us consider the equilibrium A ­ B.21. aA (21.3) (21. if we multiply the above by n moles we have aB −4Gª = nRT ln aA as a consequence of the equilibrium condition. μA = μª + RT ln aA A and μB = μª + RT ln aB B So the equilibrium condition becomes μª + RT ln aA = μª + RT ln aB A B −4μª = μª − μª = RT ln aB − RT ln aA A B aB −4μª = RT ln aA Since chemical potential is free energy per mole.2) (21.

Say the system A → B is not in equilibrium then we can not write μA = μB but we can write 4μ Proceeding as above we get z }| { μA + μB − μA = μB (21.8) A B C D Rearranging gives z }| { ac ad aμª + bμª − cμª − dμª = RT ln C D A B C D aa ab A B ≡−4rx n Gª (21.5) 4μ = μª − μª + RT ln aB − +RT ln aA B A aB 4μ = 4μª + RT ln . In a manner similar to the above aμª + aRT ln aA + bμª + bRT ln aB = cμª + cRT ln aC + dμª + dRT ln aD (21. Consider a more complicated equilibrium aA + bB ­ cC + dD. aA If the 4G < 0 then the transition A → B proceeds spontaneously as written.4) μª + RT ln aA + 4μ = μª + RT ln aB A B (21. The equilibrium condition is aμA + bμB = cμC + dμD .7) (21. aA Again multiplying by n gives 4G = 4Gª + nRT ln aB .9) 152 .6) (21.

4.3.0.0. 153 . The Partition Coefficient Up to now we have only considered miscible solutions.12) If the reactants are solutes then as the solution is diluted all the activity coefficients 0 go to unity and KC → Ka . (21. ¶ (21.11) which is related to Ka by Ka = 0 KC .10) Note: n is absent in the above since the molar values are implied by the stoichiometry. Equilibrium constants in terms of KC Equilibrium constant in terms of a condensed phase concentration: 0 KC = [C]c [D]d [A]a [B]b µ γc γd C D γa γb A B .the equilibrium constant is ac ad Ka = C D =⇒ 4Gª = −RT ln Ka aa ab A B (21. We now consider the problem of determining the equilibrium concentrations of a solute A in both phases of an immiscible mixture. 21. 21.

16) Knowledge of the partition function is important on the delivery of drugs because. 154 .13) where. to enter the body.15) [A]β . α aA ª (21.The equilibrium equation is Aα ­ Aβ The equilibrium expression for this process is 4Gα→β = 0 = 4Gª − nRT ln Ka . We can solve for the partition coefficient to yield P For low concentrations P β/α ' β/α 4G α→β aβ = A = e− nRT . α→β (21. [A]α (21. The equilibrium constant for this process has a special α α→β β β/α name. 4Gª ≡ Gª −Gª .14) (21. for species A in the α—β mixture. P β/α ≡ Kpart . it is called the partition coefficient. the drugs must transfer between an aqueous phase and a oil phase.

For example. can the drug handle the acidic environment of the stomach? 155 .For most drugs 0 < Ppart < 4 o/w (21.17) Partition coefficient o/w Delivery mechanism low Ppart (likes water) injection o/w medium Ppart oral o/w high Ppart (likes oil) skin patch/ointment Factors other than the partition coefficient influence the drug delivery choice.

B 22.1.D − aSm. For any extensive property • 4rxn (Property) = property of products − property of reactants • Example — Reaction: aA+bB= cC+dD — 4rxn S = cSm. 4rxn H > 0 for Endothermic reactions.22. Chemical Reactions Up to now we have only been considering systems in the absence of chemical reactions. After chemical reactions take place the system is in a final “product” thermodynamic state that is in general different from the initial “reactant” state. 156 156 (22.C + dSm. Heats of Reactions Exothermic reaction: heat is given off to the surroundings Endothermic reaction: heat is given taken in from the surroundings At constant pressure (Pex = P q = 4rxn U − w = 4rxn U − P 4rxn V = 4rxn H 4rxn H < 0 for Exothermic reactions.1) .A − bSm.

Temperature dependence of the heat of reaction Z T2 4rxn CP dT 4rxn H(T2 ) = 4rxn H(T1 ) + T1 (22.63 kJ 2 2CO2 +2H2 O(liq)→C2 H4 + 3O2 4rxn H ª = +1410. H2 .818 − (−285. This direct reaction is not easy but it can be done in steps C2 H2 + 5 O2 → 2CO2 +H2 O(liq) 4rxn H ª = −1299.22.1. C(graphite) are examples of atoms in their natural state.012 kJ 22.97 kJ H2 + 1 O2 →H2 O(liq) 4rxn H ª = −285.830 kJ 2 H2 O(liq)→H2 O(gas) 4rxn H ª = −241. Heats of Formation Hess’s Law of heat summation: 4rxn H is independent of chemical pathway Example: C2 H2 +H2 = C2 H4 . where ν i is the stoichiometric factor of the ith com- Example: H2 O(liq)→H2 O(gas) at SATP H2 + 1 O2 = H2 O(gas) 4f H ª = −241.2. O2 .49 kJ The heat of formation 4f H ª is the 4rxn H at STP in forming a compound from its constituent atoms in their natural states.818 kJ 2 H2 + 1 O2 = H2 O(liq) 4f H ª = −285. P i ν i 4f H(i).83 kJ 2 C2 H2 +H2 = C2 H4 4rxn H ª = −174.1. Example: Formation of water • H2 + 1 O2 = H2 O not 2H2 +O2 = 2H2 O 2 • 4rxn H = ponent.1.830) = 44.2) 157 .

7) • Note that the activity of any pure solid or liquid is for all practical purposes equal to 1. (22.4) (22. 4rxn G = i i i 4rx n Gª X i ν i μi . i So. z }| { X X ν i μª + RT ν i ln ai .6) 4rxn G = 4rxn Gª + RT ln Q. i At equilibrium. 158 .3) (22. As we saw before μi can be defined in terms of activity μi = μª + RT ln ai .5) Using the property of logarithms: a ln x + b ln y = ln(xa y b ) the above expression becomes 4rxn G = 4rxn Gª + RT ln Q Y i aν i i (22. 4rxn G = G(products) − G(reactants) = (remember μi = Gm.i for pure substance i).22. where Q ≡ i aν i is the activity quotient. Ka depends on T but is independent of P.2. Reversible reactions Recall the requirement for a spontaneous change: 4G < 0 for constant T and P. For the reaction aA + bB = cC + dD Ka = ac ad C D aa ab A B (22. 4rxn G = 0 and Q = Ka (Thermodynamic equilibrium constant).

14) T1 For a reasonably small range T2 − T1 this is well approximated by µ ¶ ª 4rxn Hm 1 1 − ln Ka (T2 ) = ln Ka (T1 ) − R T2 T1 (22. Temperature Dependence of Ka Starting with G =´H − T S or G/T = H/T − S.15) 159 .10) (22. a b PA PB (P ª aA )a (P ª aB )b i (22. ai = useful relation KP = Pi Pª = Xi P Pª (P ª = 1 bar) This leads to the sometimes or more generally KP = Ka (P ª ) c d ¡ ¢c+d−a−b PC PD (P ª aC )c (P ª aD )d = = Ka P ª . ∂(1/T P Applying this to 4rxn H ª 4rxn Gª = − 4rxn S T T gives ¶ µ ∂(4rxn Gª /T ) = 4rxn H ª ∂(1/T ) P ª Using 4rxn G = −RT ln Ka . d ln Ka =− = ∂(1/T ) P of P d(1/T ) R or (using d d(1/T ) (22. 4rxn G = 4rxn Gª + RT ln Q becomes 0 = 4rxn Gª + RT ln Ka ⇒ 4rxn Gª = −RT ln Ka . (22.9) 22.13) (22. So at equilibrium.11) (22.8) νi .• For ideal gases.12) = dT d d(1/T ) dT d = −T 2 dT ) 4rxn H ª d ln Ka = dT RT 2 Integration gives 1 ln Ka (T2 ) = ln Ka (T1 ) + R Z T2 ª 4rxn Hm T2 (22.3. ³ From this ∂(G/T)) = H. we get ¶ µ 4rxn H ª ∂ ln Ka ind.

Kn = KP • From concentration Cj = Equilibrium “constants” “constants” expression Ka KP KX Kn KC nj V = Pj . KX = KP P −4υg V • From nj = Pj RT (ideal gas approximation). • From Pj = Xj P .4. Extent of Reaction There are other equilibrium “constants” that are used in the literature. RT KC = KP (RT )−4υg ¡ RT ¢−4υg V relation to Ka – µ Ka −4υ g Kγ P ª ¶ situation used when an exact answer is needed gas reactions activity(products) activity(reactants) partial pressure(products) partial pressure(reactants) mole fraction(products) mole fraction(reactants) moles(products) moles(reactants) concentration(products) concentration(reactants) µ µ Ka −4υ g Kγ P ª Ka −4υ g Kγ P ª Ka −4υ g Kγ P ª ¶ ¶ P V −4υ g when eq.22. P is known when V is known and constant when concentration known (RT )−4υg ¡ RT ¢−4υg 160 .

(23.4) 161 161 .2) μsalt − μª salt . Ionics Many chemical processes involve electrolytes and or acids and bases. Ionic Activities Consider a salt in solution Mv+ Xv− → v+ M z+ (aq) + v− X z− (aq).3) (23.23. ln aj = RT and ln asalt = j = + or − (23. RT (23.1) where v+ (v− ) is the number of cations (anions) and z+ (z− ) is the charge on the cation (anion). 23.1. To understand these processes we must know something about how ions behave in solution. The chemical potential for the salt may be written in terms of the chemical potential for each of the ions: μsalt = v+ μ+ + v− μ− To determine the activity we start with μj − μª j .

8) v v We see that 1/v asalt = (av+ av− )1/v ≡ a± .1.6) (23. a− = γ − m− .11) 162 . 23. alternatively. This suggests that the interesting quantity is μsalt : v μª μsalt 1/v = salt + RT ln asalt .Substituting the expression for μsalt into this gives ln asalt v+ μ+ − v− μ− + v+ μª − v− μª + − = RT v+ μ+ − v+ μª v− μ− − v− μª + − + = RT RT | {z } | {z } v+ ln a+ v− ln a− (23. (23.1. asalt = av+ av− (23.5) So.7) It is the case that 1 mole of salt behaves like v = v+ + v− moles of nonelectrolytes in terms of the colligative properties. (23. The mean ionic activity coefficient is + − γ ± = (γ + γ − ) (23. (23. where m+ = v+ m and m− = v− m.9) The quantity a± is the mean ionic activity. Ionic activity coefficients The activity coefficients for ionic solutions can also be defined via a+ = γ + m+ .10) v v 1/v . ln asalt = v+ ln a+ + v− ln a− or.

Results from Debye—Hückel theory: point charge in a continuum The Debye—Hückel equation: √ −α |z+ z− | I √ .2. One can use the colligative properties to measure the ionic activity coefficients. a− .14) 23.12) where the subscript 1 refers to the solvent.The quantities a+ .16) 163 . So. (23. γ + and γ − cannot be measured individually. Recall how γ was calculated from the Gibbs-Duhem equation: Z m j ln γ ± = −j − dm0 . Similarly freezing point depression is redefined as θ = vφKf m.15) where z is the charge of the ion and m its concentration. vmM1 (23.13) (23. m0 0 where j = 1 − φ. Theory of Electrolytic Solutions Ionic strength is defined as I= 1X 2 z mi . 2 i i (23. ln γ ± = 1 − Ba0 I (23. vφ corresponds to the empirical factor i discussed earlier. It is convenient to redefine the osmotic coefficient as φ= −1000 g/kg ln a1 .

Notice that the parameters α and B depend only on the solvent.20) v+ + v− 1− I This equation works well to ionic strengths of about I = 0.18) 1000εkT a0 is the radius of closest approach.21) 164 .1 23. which is observed exP perimentally (recall I = 1 i zi2 mi ). ε is the dielectric constant for the pure solvent and L is Avogadro’s number. Q: I= dQ dt (23. I is given by the rate of change (in time) of charge. Ion Mobility Current. (23. (23. ρ• is the density of the pure solvent.where α= e3 (εkT )3/2 B= µ 2πρ• L 1000 ¶1/2 . It is seen that √ the DHLL correctly predicts the m dependence of ln γ ± . (23.17) 8πLe2 ρ• .19) This gives the dependence of ln γ ± for dilute solutions (m → 0). 2 A useful empirical approximation is to set Ba0 = 1 and to add an empirical correction to get the : √ µ 2 ¶ 2 v+ + v− −α |z+ z− | I √ ln γ ± = + 2βm . e is the charge on the electron.3. One important approximation to this equation is to neglect the B term to get the Debye—Hukel limiting Law (DHLL): √ ln γ ± = −α |z+ z− | I. (23.

Some relevant constants • charge of an electron e = 1.602177 × 10−19 C. is required to move a change through a potential (or voltage). Ion mobility 165 .3.(Electrical) work. • Faraday’s constant F = Le = 96485 C/mol (Avogadro’s number of electrons) 23.23) Conductance is the inverse of the resistance (R−1 ). ε: w = −εQ (23.1.22) Power is given by the product of the voltage and the current: p = −εI Resistance is given by the ratio of the voltage to current: R= ε I (23. w.

So the total force on the ions is a sum of the Coulomb force and the viscous drag Fi = zi eE − fvi (in solution). zi eE zi eE = f vi =⇒ vi = . Hence Fi = 0.25) Ni Ni dNi Avi 4t =⇒ = Avi V dt V Ni Avi V (in vacuum) (23. (23. −. where E is the electric field. dt dt (23. i.30) The ions quickly reach terminal velocity. E = Also recall Newton’s law dε .26) (23.e. For uniform ion velocity (vi ) the number of ions arriving at the electrode during any given time interval 4t is 4Ni = so Ii = |zi | e Recall Coulomb’s law Fi = zi eE.31) f The drag f has three basic origins. the viscous drag equals the Coulomb force.. dx (23.The total current passing through an ionic solution is determined by the sum of the current carried by the cations and by the anions I = I+ + I− Now Ii = where i = +. 166 .27) (23.29) The moving ions experience a viscous drag f that is proportional to their velocities. dt (23.24) dQi dNi = |zi | e . (23.28) Fi = mai = m dvi = zi eE.

Electrophoretic effect. Stoke’s Law type force • “spherical” ion moving through a continuous medium • this contribution is independent of the other ions 2.1. a “dressed” ion. Relaxation effects • solvation shell must re-adjust as ion moves. • oppositely charged ions “pull” at each other 3. 167 .

32) E For the case for parallel plate capacitors E = ε . (23. (23.34) Suppose a salt has a degree of dissociation α (α = 1 for strong electrolytes) to produce ν + cations and ν − anions. vi l .33) ui = ε Here the current carried by ion i is Ii = |zi | e Ni ui ε A . vi ui = . then each mole of salt gives: N+ = αν + Ln and N− = αν − Ln.A more fundamental quantity than ion velocity is the ion mobility. ui which is the ion’s velocity per field.35) It is of interest to determine the ratio of the current carried by the cation versus the anion. V l (23. 168 .36) I− / ν −/ |z− | u− A / Vεl α n / F / ν − |z− | u− u− Thus the ratio of the currents is determined by simply the ratio of the mobilities. =1 z }| { / ν +/ |z+ | u+ A / Vεl / F / ν + |z+ | u+ u+ α n I+ = = = (23. where l is the separation of the l plates. The current then becomes Ii = |zi | e αν i Ln ui ε F=Le ε A = αν i n |zi | ui AF V l Vl (23. So.

but we will stick with this simple thermodynamic model. The way to investigate the ion—solvent interaction upon solvation from a thermodynamics point of view is to consider the change in the properties of the ion in a vacuum versus the ion in solution.24. 4Gv→s can be determined by calculating the reversible work done in transferring an ion into the bulk of the solvent. Of course this is an approximation and numerous statistical mechanical models for solvents which incorporate a more realistic structure can be used. As a basic treatment of solvation we shall consider the solvent as a non-structural continuum and the ion as a charged particle. Thermodynamics of Solvation An extremely important application of thermodynamics is to that of ion solvation. Primarily we will determine 4Gv→s ≡ Gion in solv. 169 169 . We will focus on ions in solution. Since Gibbs free energy corresponds to non-P V work. − Gion in vac . Solvation describes how a solute dissolves in a solvent.

24.1. The Born Model The Born model is a simple solvation model in which the ions are taken to be charged spheres and the solvent is take to be a continuum with dielectric constant εs 170 .

wdis . wch . wtr = 0. (This is an approximation). done in charging the sphere which is now in the solvent. done in discharging the sphere. • Assume the uncharged sphere can pass from the (neutral) vacuum to the neutral solvent without doing any work.4Gv→s for the Born model is obtained by considering the following contribution to the work of ion transfer from the vacuum state to the solvated state (see figure) • Begin with the state in which the charged sphere (the ion) is in a vacuum. 171 . • Determine the work. • Determine the work.

172 . 4Gv→s = wdis + wtr + wch = wdis + wch (24. The work done is discharging is some what complicated since as one removes the charge the work done in removing more charge changes according to the amount of charge currently on the sphere.1) Work done in discharging the sphere: The act of discharging a sphere involves bringing out to infinity from the surface infinitesimal amounts of charge.So.

wch = + (ze)2 8π 0 εs ri (24.3) 24. Work done in charging the sphere: The only difference in charging the sphere is that the sign of the work will be different and that since we are charging in a solvent we must multiply the permittivity of free space by the dielectric constant of the solvent.1. So.5) 173 . ri is the radius of the sphere (ion) and 0 is the permittivity of free space.2) where z is the oxidation state of the ion. = − 8π 0 ri (24. Free Energy of Solvation for the Born Model Combining the above two expression for work gives 4Gv→s = − (ze)2 (ze)2 + 8π 0 ri 8π 0 εs ri µ ¶ (ze)2 1 = −1 8π 0 ri εs N (ze)2 = 8π 0 ri µ ¶ 1 −1 εs (24.4) The above expression is 4Gv→s /ion.This is expressed mathematically as Z 0Z ∞ σ wdis = drdσ 2 ze ri 4π 0 r Z 0 σ dσ = ze 4π 0 ri (ze)2 .1. For n moles of ions (nL = N) 4Gv→s (24. e is the charge of the electron.

2.3. Thus ions always exist more stably in solution than in a vacuum. Enthalpy and Entropy of Solvation We may employ the standard thermodynamic relations which we have derived earlier to obtain the entropy and enthalpy for the Born model.7) 24. 174 .6) The Partition Coefficient We can now write the partition coefficient for the Born model as α/β Pi =e −4Gª β→α nRT =e − 8πr L(ze)2 i 0 RT 1 − ε1 εα β (24. Ion Transfer Between Phases We can quickly generalize the Born model to describe ion transfer between phases in a solution of two immiscible phases Consider an immiscible solution of two phases α and β having dielectric constants εα and εβ .1. 24. Since Gibbs free energy is a state function we can write the change in free energy for transfer of an ion form the β phase to the α phase as z }| { 4Gβ→v + 4Gv→α µ µ ¶ ¶ N (ze)2 1 N (ze)2 1 = − −1 + −1 8π 0 ri εβ 8π 0 ri εα µ ¶ 1 N (ze)2 1 − = 8π 0 ri εα εβ =−4Gv →β 4Gβ→α = (24.The dielectric constant of any solvent is always greater than unity so ε1s − 1 is always negative hence 4Gv→s < 0.1.

11) 24. εs (24. (24. the Born model does not make quantitatively correct predictions in many cases. µ ¶ 1 N (ze)2 ∂εs N (ze)2 ∂ . Corrections to the Born Model The Born model is very valuable because of its simplicity–qualitative statements about solvation and ion transfer between phases can be made. Unfortunately however. (24. We simply list here several phenomena that more sophisticated theories of solvation must consider 175 .2.9) The only variable in the above equation that has a temperature dependence is the dielectric constant of the solvent so.From µ ∂G ∂T ¶ P = −S ⇒ µ ∂4Gv→s ∂T ¶ P = −4Sv→s .10) = 4Sv→s = − 8π 0 ri ∂T εs 8π 0 ri ε2 ∂T s Enthalpy is obtained via the relation: 4Hv→s = 4Gv→s + T 4Sv→s µ ¶ N (ze)2 1 N (ze)2 T ∂εs = −1 + 8π 0 ri εs 8π 0 ri ε2 ∂T s ¶ µ 2 N (ze) 1 T ∂εs −1 = + 2 8π 0 ri εs εs ∂T (24.8) we find entropy to be 4Sv→s ∂ =− ∂T " N (ze)2 8π 0 ri µ ¶# 1 −1 .

so the initial structure of the solvent must breakdown and the new structure must form. Changes in solvent structure: the local environment of the ion has a different arrangement of solvent molecules than that of the bulk solvent. Specific interactions: any interaction energy specific to the particular ionsolvent pair: Hydrogen bonding being the prime example. Annihilation of defects: A small ion may be captured in a micro-cavity within the solvent releasing the energy of the micro-cavity defect.1. 3. 4. The solvophobic effect: a cavity must form in the solvent to accommodate the ion. 176 . 2.

This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material.2) . Key Equations for Exam 4 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 4. The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations. Equations • Some thermodynamic relations H = U + PV A = U − TS G = H − TS • The chemical potential equation μi = μª + RT ln ai i • The 4G equation (this should be posted on your refrigerator) 4G = 4Gª + RT ln Q.25. 177 177 dH = T dS + V dP dA = −SdT − P dV dG = −SdT + V dP (25. The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets.1) (25.

At equilibrium 4G = 0 and 4Gª = −RT ln Ka • For an ideal gas CP m = Cvm + R (25.3)

(25.4)

• The Debye—Hukel limiting Law (DHLL):

√ ln γ ± = −α |z+ z− | I.

(25.5)

• The ratio of the current carried by the cation versus the anion in terms of ion mobility is I+ u+ = (25.6) I− u− • The chemical potential equation μi = μª + RT ln ai i • The 4G equation (this should be posted on your refrigerator) 4G = 4Gª + RT ln Q. At equilibrium 4G = 0 and 4Gª = −RT ln Ka • 4G for the Born model: 4Gv→s N (ze)2 = 8π 0 rs µ ¶ 1 −1 εs (25.9) (25.8) (25.7)

(25.10)

• 4G for transfer of an ion form the β phase to the α phase, µ ¶ N (ze)2 1 1 − 4Gβ→α = 8π 0 ri εα εβ

(25.11)

178

Chemistry 352: Physical Chemistry II

179
179

Part V Quantum Mechanics and Dynamics

180
180

26. Particle in a 3D Box
We now return to quantum mechanics and investigate some of the important models that we omitted from the first semester. In particular we will look at the particle in a box in more than one dimension. We will also solve models which deal with rotations.

26.1. Particle in a Box
Recall that the important ideas from the 1D particle in a box problem were The potential, V (x), is given by ⎧ ⎪ ⎨ ⎪ ⎩ ∞ ∞ x≤0 0<x<a . x≥a

V (x) =

0

(26.1)

Because of the infinities at x = 0 and x = a, we need to partition the x-axis into the three regions shown in the figure.

181
181

Now, in region I and III, where the potential is infinite, the particle can never exist so, ψ must equal zero in these regions. The particle must be found only in region II. The Schrödinger equation in region II is (V (x) = 0) −~2 d2 ψ(x) ˆ Hψ = Eψ =⇒ = Eψ, 2m dx2 The general solution of this differential equation is ψ(x) = A sin kx + B cos kx, where k = q
2mE . ~2

(26.2)

(26.3)

Now ψ must be continuous for all x. Therefore it must satisfy the boundary conditions (b.c.): ψ(0) = 0 and ψ(a) = 0. From the ψ(0) = 0 b.c. we see that the constant B must be zero because cos kx|x=0 = 1. So we are left with ψ(x) = A sin kx for our wavefunction.

182

The second b.c., ψ(a) = 0, places certain restrictions on k. In particular,

nπ , n = 1, 2, 3, · · · . a The values of k are quantized. So, now we have kn = ψn (x) = A sin nπx . a

(26.4)

(26.5)

The constant A is the normalization constant. Solving for A gives A= r

2 . a

(26.6)

Thus our normalized wavefunctions for a particle in a box are (in region II) r nπx 2 sin . (26.7) ψ n (x) = a a We found the energy levels to be En =
h n2 π 2 ~2 ~= 2π n2 h2 = . 2ma2 8ma2

(26.8)

26.2. The 3D Particle in a Box Problem
We now consider the three dimensional version of the problem. The potential is now V (x, y, z) = ( 0, 0 < x < a, 0 < y < b, 0 < z < c . ∞, else (26.9)

183

Now the Schrödinger equation is −~2 2 ˆ ∇ ψ = Eψ Hψ = Eψ ⇒ 2m µ ¶ −~2 ∂ 2 ψ ∂ 2 ψ ∂ 2 ψ + 2 + 2 = Eψ. ⇒ 2m ∂x2 ∂y ∂z

(26.10)

It is generally true that when the Hamiltonian is a sum of independent terms, we can write the wavefunction as a product of wavefunctions ψ(x, y, z) = ψx (x)ψ y (y)ψ z (z). (26.11)

This lets us perform a mathematical trick which is sometimes useful in solving partial differential equations. Subbing the product wavefunction into the Schrödinger equation we get µ ¶ −~2 ∂ 2 ψx ψy ψz ∂ 2 ψx ψy ψz ∂ 2 ψx ψy ψz = Eψ x ψy ψz + + (26.12) 2m ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 µ ¶ −~2 ψy ψz ∂ 2 ψx ψx ψz ∂ 2 ψy ψx ψy ∂ 2 ψz = Eψ x ψy ψz . + + 2m ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2

We now divide both sides by ψx ψy ψz to get µ ¶ 1 ∂ 2ψy 1 ∂ 2ψz −~2 1 ∂ 2 ψx = E. + + 2m ψx ∂x2 ψy ∂y 2 ψz ∂z 2 This equation is now of the form f (x) + g(y) + h(z) = C, where C is a constant. If we take the derivative with respect to x we get d→ f (x) + g(y) + h(z) = C, dx → dC df (x) dg(y) dh(z) + + = , dx dx dx dx df (x) = 0, dx

(26.13)

(26.14)

(26.15)

184

19) and the total energy is (26.nz The total wavefunction is n2 h2 x . 8mb2 n2 h2 z = .So. Similarly for g(y) and h(z) Applying this to our Schrödinger equation means that we have converted our partial differential equation into three independent ordinary differential equations.nx = Ey.ny + Ez. Hence we immediately have ψx = ψy ψz and Ex. a a r ny πy 2 sin . (26. −~2 d2 ψx −~2 1 d2 ψx = Ex =⇒ = Ex ψx 2m ψx dx2 2m dx2 −~2 d2 ψy −~2 1 d2 ψy = Ey =⇒ = Ey ψy 2m ψy dy 2 2m dy 2 −~2 d2 ψz −~2 1 d2 ψz = Ez =⇒ = Ez ψz 2m ψz dz 2 2m dz 2 which we recognize as the 1D particle in a box equations.ny Ez.20) 185 . 8ma2 n2 h2 y = .nz . = b b r nz πz 2 sin = c c r (26. 8mc2 (26.nx + Ey.16) √ ny πy nz πz 2 2 nx πx sin sin ψ=√ sin a b c abc E = Ex.17) (26.18) nx πx 2 sin . f (x) is a constant.

When n(> 1) states have the same total energy they are said to be n-fold degenerate. nz = 2) have the same total energy and thus are degenerate. (nx = 1. Let the 3D box be a cube (a = b = c) then the states (nx = 2. ny = 1. ny = 1.21) 186 .Degeneracy The 3D particle in a box model brings up the concept of degeneracy. nz = 1). (nx = 1. ny = 2. (26. nz = 1).

y = x2 . Operator Algebra We now take a mathematical excursion and discuss the algebra of operators.g. into another ˆ function. Addition on the set of real numbers. etc. Multiplication on the set of real numbers 187 187 .1. say x: y = f(x) — e. say O. Definitions • Function: A function.. is related to an independent variable. • Algebra: An algebra is a specific collection of rules applied to a set of objects and a particular operation — Rules ∗ Transitivity ∗ Associativity ∗ Existence of an identity ∗ Existence of an inverse — e.g. say f.. ˆ • Operator: An operator. y = sin x. say f .27. describes how a dependent variable. transforms a function. say g: Of(x) = g(x). say y. Operators 27.

1) 2 1 1 1 7 3 but " 3 1 1 1 #" 1 0 2 1 # " 5 1 3 1 # " 3 1 7 3 # = 6= (27.4) (27. " #" # " # 1 0 3 1 3 1 = (27.5) (27. Inverse: ˆ if αf (x) = g(x) and βg(x) = f (x) ˆ ˆ ˆ then β = α−1 and is said to be α inverse ˆ (27.. ˆ ˆ ˆ then (ˆ + β)f (x) = αf (x) + βf (x) = g(x) + h(x) α ˆ 3.2) Algebraic rules for operators 1. ˆˆ 4. e.3) ˆˆ ˆ α β αf (x) = β (ˆ f (x)) .6) 188 . Addition: ˆ if αf (x) = g(x) and βf (x) = h(x).— Note: Commutivity is not a requirement of an algebra ∗ example 1: multiplication on the set of real number is commutive: ab = ba ∗ example 2: multiplication on the set of n × n matrices is not commutive: ab 6= ba in general. ˆˆ but in general αβf (x) 6= β αf (x).g. Multiplication: ³ ´ ˆ (x) = α βf (x) ˆ αβf ˆ ˆ (27. then αf (x) = g(x) = βf (x) ˆ ˆ ˆ 2. Equality: ˆ if α = β.

z) = ∂ ex + ∂ ey + ∂ ez f(x. y. α. ˆ α Hermitian operators: • A special class of linear operators • All observables in quantum mechanics are associated with Hermitian operators • The eigenvalues of Hermitian operators are real Some important operators 1. and ˆ ˆ ˆ — α(λf (x)) = λˆ f (x). This leads to the construction of the ˆˆ ˆˆ commutator. z) ˆ • ∇: ∂x ∂y ∂z ´ ³ 2 2 2 ∂ ∂2 ∂2 ˆ ˆ • ∇ : ∇ f (x.Linear operators: • A special and important class of operators • They obey all of the above properties in addition to — α (f (x) + g(x)) = αf (x) + αg(x). y. y. [◦. β ˆ ˆˆ ˆˆ (27. where λ is a complex number. −y. • x: xf(x) = xf(x) ˆ ˆ ³ ´ ¢ ¡ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ d • d2 : d2 f (x) = d df (x) = d dx f (x) = d f (x) dx d dx ˆ ˆ • d: df (x) = • ˆ: ˆf (x. z) = ∂x2 + ∂y2 + ∂z2 f (x. −z) ı ı ´ ³ ˆ ∇f(x.7) 189 . z) = f (−x. z) ¡d dx ¢ f (x) = d2 f (x) dx2 Commutators: We have seen that in general αβ 6= β α. y. ◦]: h i ˆ ≡ αβ − β α. y.

β = 0 and α and β are said to commute with one another. ˆ α ˆ ˆ β (ˆ f ) = β (af) = aβf because f is an eigenfunction of α. then βf (x) = bf (x). Commuting operators and simultaneous sets of eigenfunctions. ˆˆ ˆ ˆ If αβ ˆ ˆ ˆ The eigenvalue equation: If αf (x) = g(x) and g(x) = af(x). ˆ Thus (27. this to be true is if βf 190 . ˆ On the other hand. The only way for ˆ ˆ = bf. then the operator equation. ˆ ˆ (27. ³ ´ ˆ α β (ˆ f ) = α βf ˆ ˆ ³ ´ ³ ´ ˆ α βf = a βf . We shall see that eigenvalues of certain operator can be identified as experimental observables.h i ˆ = β α. ˆ ˆ The proof goes as follows: On the one hand.9) (27. ˆ (27. ˆ ˆ If αf (x) = af (x) and β and α commute.10) ˆ because β and α commute.11) ˆ which states that βf is an eigenfunction of α with eigenvalue a. then α.8) The eigenvalue equation is of fundamental importance in quantum theory. αf (x) = g(x) ˆ ˆ becomes the eigenvalue equation αf (x) = af (x).

27. (27.2. j 6= k. Completeness.12) j space Theorem 2: The eigenfunctions of a Hermitian operator form a complete set Corollary (the superposition principle): Any arbitrary function ψ in the space of eigenfunctions {ϕi } can be written as a superposition of these eigenfunctions: X ψ= ai ϕi (27. Orthogonality.13) i 191 . and the Superposition Principle Theorem 1: The eigenfunctions of a Hermitian operator corresponding to different eigenvalues are orthogonal: Z ψ∗ ψk = 0.

28. Angular Momentum
We will encounter several different types of angular momenta, but fortunately they are all described by a single theory Before starting with the quantum mechanical treatment of angular momentum, we first review the classical treatment.

28.1. Classical Theory of Angular Momentum
The classical angular momentum, L, is given by L=x×p (28.1)

Hence,

The vector cross-product can be computed by finding the following determinant: ¯ ¯ ¯ ex ey ez ¯ Ly Lx Lz ¯ z }| { ¯ z }| { z }| { ¯ ¯ (28.2) L = ¯ x y z ¯ = (ypz − zpy )ex + (zpx − xpz )ey + (xpy − ypx )ez ¯ ¯ ¯ px py pz ¯ Lx = (ypz − zpy ) , Ly = (zpx − xpz ) , Lz = (xpy − ypx ) . (28.3) (28.4) (28.5)

Another quantity that we will find useful is L2 = L · L = L2 + L2 + L2 x y z 192
192

(28.6)

28.2. Quantum theory of Angular Momentum
So, in accordance with postulate II, we replace the classical variables with their operators. That is, µ ¶ ˆ x = (ˆpz − z py ) = ~ y ∂ − z ∂ , (28.7) L yˆ ˆˆ i ∂z ∂y µ ¶ ∂ ∂ ~ ˆ z −x , (28.8) zˆ ˆˆ Ly = (ˆpx − xpz ) = i ∂x ∂z µ ¶ ∂ ∂ ~ ˆ x −y . (28.9) xˆ ˆˆ Lz = (ˆpy − y px ) = i ∂y ∂x Recall the basic commutators. ∙ ¸ ∂ , u = 1, ∂u ∙ ¸ ∂ , v = 0, ∂u (28.10)

where u, v = x, y, or z and u 6= v. From these basic commutators one can derive h i i h ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ x , Ly = i~Lz , ˆ y , Lz = i~Lx , L L

and

i h ˆ ˆ ˆ z , Lx = i~Ly L

(28.11)

i h i h i h ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ 2 , Lx = L2 , Ly = L2 , Lz = 0 L

(28.12)

It is often convenient to express the angular momentum operators in spherical polar coordinates as follows. ¶ µ ∂ ∂ ˆ Lx = i~ sin φ + cot θ cos φ , (28.13) ∂θ ∂φ ¶ µ ˆ y = −i~ cos φ ∂ − cot θ sin φ ∂ , (28.14) L ∂θ ∂φ

193

∂ ˆ Lz = −i~ ∂φ µ 2 ¶ 1 ∂2 ∂ ∂ 2 2 ˆ + cot θ + L = −~ ∂θ sin2 θ ∂φ2 ∂θ2

(28.15) (28.16)

28.3. Particle on a Ring
Consider a particle of mass μ confined to move on a ring of radius R. The moment of inertia is I = μR2 The Hamiltonian is given by ˆ −~2 d2 L2 ˆ H= z = 2I 2I dφ2 (note that we use d rather than ∂ since the problem is one-dimensional). The Schrödinger equation becomes −~2 d2 ψ = Eψ 2I dφ2 (28.18) (28.17)

Notice that this Schrödinger equation is exactly the same form as the particle in a box. The only difference is the boundary conditions. The boundary condition for the particle in a box were ψ was zero outside the box. Now the boundary condition is that ψ(φ) = ψ(φ + 2π). The wavefunction must by 2π periodic. The allowable wavefunctions are

⎧ ⎪ A cos mφ ⎨ ψm (φ) = A sin mφ , ⎪ ⎩ Aeimφ

(28.19)

194

m = 0, ±1, ±2, ±3, . . . These wavefunctions are really the “same.” It will be most convenient to use ψm (φ) = Aeimφ as our wave functions. Plugging ψm (φ) = Aeimφ into the Schrödinger equation gives −~2 d2 Aeimφ = Em Aeimφ 2I dφ2 ~2 m2 imφ Ae = Em Aeimφ 2I Therefore the energy levels (the eigenvalues) for a particle in a ring are m2 h2 ~2 m2 = . 2I 8π2 I Next we need to find the normalization constant, A. Z 2π ψ∗ ψdφ 1 = Z0 2π 1 = A2 e−imφ eimφ dφ 0 Z 2π 2 1 = A dφ = 2πA2 , Em =
0

(28.20)

(28.21)

(28.22)

thus

1 . 2π Hence the normalized wavefunctions for a particle on a ring are 1 ψ = √ eimφ . 2π A=

r

(28.23)

(28.24)

28.4. General Theory of Angular Momentum
To discuss angular momentum in a more general way it is convenient to define two so-called ‘ladder’ operators ˆ ˆ ˆ L+ ≡ Lx + iLy (28.25)

195

and ˆ ˆ We collect here the commutators of L+ and L− : h i ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz , L+ = L+ ⇒ L+ Lz = Lz L+ − L+ i h ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz , L− = −L− ⇒ L− Lz = Lz L− + L− ˆ ˆ ˆ L− ≡ Lx − iLy (28.26)

(28.27) (28.28)

ˆ ˆ Now, since Lz and L2 commute there must exist a set of simultaneous eigenfunctions {ψi } ˆ (28.29) Lz ψi = mψ i and ˆ L2 ψi = k2 ψi (28.30) Physically, k~ represents the length of the angular momentum vector and m~ represents the projection onto the z-axis. (Note: for simplicity in writing we are ‘hiding’ the ~ in the wavefunctions.) On these physical grounds we conclude |m| ≤ k, i.e., k sets an upper and lower limit on m. Let’s define the maximum value of m to be a new quantum number l ≡ mmax . (Thus l ≤ k). And let’s define the minium value of m to be a new quantum number l0 ≡ mmin . (Thus −l0 ≤ k) Now, at least one of the eigenfunctions in the set {ψ i } yields the eigenvalue mmax ˆ (or l) when operated on by Lz . Let’s call that eigenfunction ψl ; ˆ Lz ψl = lψ l . ˆ Now we can operate on both sides of this equation with L− : ˆ ˆ ˆ L− Lz ψl = L− lψ l (28.32) (28.31)

196

ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Using the commutator relation L− Lz = Lz L− + L− we get ´ ³ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz L− + L− ψl = lL− ψl ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz L− ψl + L− ψl = lL− ψl

(28.33)

Bringing the second term on the left hand side over to the right hand side gives ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz L− ψl = lL− ψl − L− ψl ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz L− ψl = (l − 1)L− ψl | {z } | {z }
ψ l−1 ψ l−1

(28.34)

ˆ ˆ We see that L− ψl ≡ ψl−1 is in fact an eigenfunction of Lz (with associated eigenvalue (l − 1)) and is thus a member of {ψi } . The eigenfunction ψl−1 has an associated eigenvalue that is one unit less then the maximum value. ˆ− The above procedure can be repeated n times so that Ln ψl = ψl−n provided n does not exceed l − l0 . The eigenfunction ψ l−n has an associated eigenvalue that is n units less then the maximum value, i.e., ˆ Lz ψl−n = (l − n)ψ l−n . (28.35) The largest value of n is l − l0 . For that case, ˆ Lz ψl0 = (l − l + l0 )ψl0 = l0 ψl0 . (28.36)

ˆ Similar behavior is seen for the operator L+ , except in the opposite direction–the ˆ eigenvalue is increased by one unit for each action of L+ . For example ˆ ˆ ˆ L+ Lz ψl0 = L+ l0 ψl0 ´ ³ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz L+ − L+ ψl0 = l0 L+ ψl0 (28.37)

ˆ ˆ ˆ Lz L+ ψl0 = (l0 + 1)L+ ψl0 .

197

ˆ ˆ The raising and lowering nature of L+ and L− is why they are called ladder operators. ˆ ˆ We can not act with L+ and L− indefinitely since we are limited by l–we reach the ends of the ladder. This requires that ˆ L− ψl0 = 0 (we can’t go lower than the lowest step) and ˆ L+ ψl = 0 (we can’t go higher than the highest step). ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Often times the ladder operators appear in tandem either as L− L+ or L+ L− so it is useful list some identities for these products ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆz ˆ L− L+ = L2 − L2 − Lz and ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆz ˆ L+ L− = L2 − L2 + Lz (28.41) (28.40) (28.39) (28.38)

We can use these identities to derive a relation between the quantum numbers k and l. We begin with ³ ´ ˆ ˆ − L+ ψl = L− L+ ψl = 0, ˆ ˆ L

(28.42)

Therefore

but from the first of the above identities ´ ³ ˆz ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ L− L+ ψl = L2 − L2 − Lz ψl = (k2 − l2 − l)ψ l k2 − l2 − l = 0 ⇒ k = p l(l + 1).

(28.43)

(28.44)

198

46) substituting in the relation we just found for k gives (28. ˆ L2 ψlm = l(l + 1)ψ lm ˆ Lz ψlm = mψ lm (28.We we can also consider ³ ´ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ L+ L− ψl0 = L+ L− ψl0 = 0 ´ ³ ˆ ˆ ˆz ˆ ˆ L+ L− ψl0 = L2 − L2 + Lz ψl0 = (k 2 − l02 + l0 )ψl0 .48) (28. (28. simplifying gives l = −l0 Thus mmax = l. φ). mmin = −l and so m = l. l − 2.50) The solutions to this partial differential equation are known to be the spherical harmonic functions ψ lm = Ylm (θ. Quantum Properties of Angular Momentum The eigenfunctions of angular momentum are entirely specified by two quantum numbers l and m: ψlm . . .47) 28.5.49) If we write out the first of these explicitly in spherical polar coordinates as a partial differential equation we obtain 1 ∂ 2 ψlm ∂ 2 ψlm ∂ψlm + + cot θ + l(l + 1)ψ lm = 0 ∂θ sin2 θ ∂φ2 ∂θ2 (28.51) 199 . −l. . . l − 1.45) and (28. This also implies that the number of ‘rungs’ is 2l + 1 and that l must be either an integer or a half-integer. −l + 1 . l(l + 1) − l02 + l0 = 0. (28.

φ)Ylm (θ.1. φ) sin θdθdφ = 0 0 l0 6= l or m0 6= m 0 0 28. 200 . All 2l + 1 of these wavefunctions correspond to the same energy. 2I so the Schrödinger equation is ~2 ˆ ~2 ˆ Hψ lm = Elm ψlm ⇒ L2 ψlm = Elm ψlm ⇒ l(l + 1)ψlm = Elm ψlm . Both the spherical harmonics and the Legendra polynomials are tabulated. meaning.52) where the Pl (θ) are the Legendra polynomials and A is normalization constant. The spherical harmonics (and hence the angular momentum wavefunctions) are orthonormal. ψlm = Ylm (θ. In other words. The rigid rotor Rotational energy For general rotation in three dimensions the is ~2 ˆ ˆ H = L2 . We know that there are 2l + 1 different m values for a particular l value. They are also built-in functions of Mathematica. φ) = APl (θ)eimφ .5. |m| |m| (28. but they are a product of a function only of θ and a function only of φ.56) 2I 8π2 I There is no m dependence for the energy.53) Yl∗m0 (θ.The spherical harmonics are functions of two variables. the energy levels are determined only by the value of l.54) l(l + 1)h2 l(l + 1)~2 = = El . (28. We say the there is a 2l + 1 degeneracy of the energy levels. ( Z 2π Z π 1 l0 = l and m0 = m (28.55) (28. 2I 2I Thus Elm = (28.

The values of m = ms are limited to +1/2 and −1/2.29. One example of such a system is the spin of an electron. One peculiarity of this system is that the wavefunctions are 4π periodic (and 2π antiperiodic): ψs (θ) = −ψs (θ + 2π) (29.1. l = s = 1/2. These systems have no classical analogs. Addition of Angular Momentum 29. Systems in which l takes on half-integer values are peculiar. Spin Angular Momentum We learned above that l may take on integer or half-integer values. (29. ∗ ∗ ∗ See in-class demonstration: the belt trick ∗ ∗∗ 201 201 .1) and ψ s (θ) = ψs (θ + 4π).2) That means that the system has to ‘rotate’ twice (in spin space not coordinate space) to get back to its original state.

The electrons in many electron atoms couple.29. The are two main coupling schemes which account for the total angular momentum of the atom. (M = i mi ) • then J = L + S 2. (Ms = i msi ) P • find the total orbital angular momentum L = Mmax . jj coupling • applies to higher atomic weight atoms • find subtotal angular momentum for each electron ji = li + si P • then find total angular momentum by J = i ji . however. One measures.max .2.2. 29. The Addition of Angular Momentum: General Theory Consider two sources of angular momentum for a system represented by the opˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ erators J1 and J2 (J1 and J2 could be L or S angular momentum. • we will not use this method. we use J when we speak generally. Addition of Angular Momentum In atoms the are a number of sources of angular momentum: The l’s and s’s of each of the electrons.1. LS coupling (also called Russell-Saunders coupling) • works well for low atomic weight atoms (first couple of rows of the periodic table) P • find the total spin angular momentum S = Ms. J.) 202 . the total angular momentum. 1.

ˆ ˆ ˆ The total angular momentum is JT = J1 + J2 . |j1 − j2 | + 1. Jmin = |j1 − j2 | . ˆ ˆ ˆ The total z-component of the angular momentum is JzT = Jz1 + Jz2 The last statement implies that the orientation quantum number of the total system is simple the sum of that for the components M = m1 + m2 (29. (29. 29.5) The total angular momentum is quantized is exactly the same manner as any other angular momentum.6) 203 .4) This corresponds to a situation in which component angular momentums add in the most favorable manner The minimum value of J is determined by the case when the components add in the least favorable manner. That is.2. . |j1 − j2 | .2. . An Example: Two Electrons The table below shows the total spin angular momentum S for a two electron system (29.3) We need to determine the allowed values of the total angular momentum quantum number J. . . The maximum value of J is determined by the maximum value of M by Jmax = Mmax = m1max + m2max = j1 + j2 (29. Thus the allowed values of J are J = j1 + j2 . j1 + j2 − 1.

So. 29. it is worthwhile to briefly discuss them. G H 204 .3. For historical reasons L values are associated with a letter like the l values of a hydrogenic system are. of the states is given by 2S + 1. those being 1 S and 3 S during our discussion of helium. In the above example the degeneracy is gS = 3 for the S = 1 states and gS = 1 for the S = 0 states. In general the term symbol is simply notates the total orbital angular momentum and spin degeneracies of a particular set of states (or a state in the case of a singlet state). The orbital degeneracy is given by gL = 2L + 1.2. Term symbols are useful for predict and understanding spectroscopic data.spin state α(1)α(2) β(1)β(2) α(1)β(2) + β(1)α(2) α(1)β(2) − β(1)α(2) ms1 1 2 ms1 1 2 MS 1 −1 0 0 S 1 1 1 0 −1 2 0 0 −1 2 0 0 Counting states: The spin degeneracy. gS . Term symbols are simply shorthand notion used to identify states. L 0 symbol S 1 P 2 D 3 F 4 5 . Term Symbols We have already seen several term symbols.

Rules: 1. • E.2. These states are all singlet S states. If several terms have the same multiplicity then ground state will be that of the largest L. Hund’s Rule for the ground state only.4. notated by 1 S 2. 3. These dipoles interact with a certain spin—orbit interaction energy ESO . The spin—orbit Hamiltonian is [ ˆ HSO = hcAL · S ´ ³ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ SO = hcA J 2 − L2 − S 2 . S = 0. H 2 (29. Spin Orbit Coupling A charge possessing angular momentum has a magnetic dipole associated with it. Lowest J value (regular) “electron”. Highest J value (inverted) “hole” 29.7) 205 . 3. The ground state will have maximum multiplicity. 2.The term symbol for a particular states is constructed from the following general template gS LJ . Many electron atoms have term symbols associated with their states. p1 and p5 have the same term symbol. All closed shells have zero spin and orbital angular momentums: L = 0. An electron and a “hole” lead to equivalent term symbols.. 1. An electron has orbital and spin magnetic dipoles.g.

where A is the spin—orbit coupling constant. From the Hamiltonian the spin—orbit interaction energy is ESO = hcA [J(J + 1) − L(L + 1) − S(S + 1)] 2 (29.8) 206 .

there are very few models for which we can obtain an exact solution. Perturbation Theory The basic procedure of perturbation theory • Find a solvable system that is similar to the system at hand. Now we will consider two important quantitative approximation methods: (i) perturbation theory and (ii) variational theory 30. 207 207 . • These wavefunctions are used to find a first order correction to the energy. • Treat the difference between the two systems as a perturbation to the solvable system • Use the solvable system’s wavefunctions as a zeroth order approximation to the wavefunctions for the unsolvable system. we always took the simplest approximation to give the qualitative properties of the unsolvable system. Last semester. Approximation Techniques As we learned last semester. Consequently we must be satisfied with using approximation methods.1.30.

4) 208 . This is given by Z (1) ˆ En = ψ(0)∗ H (1) ψ(0) dx.3) • The perturbative part of the Hamiltonian is ˆ H (1) = ax4 . . This process get algebraically intensive so we will only go as far as listing the first order energy correction. (30. The nth state energy in perturbation theory: (0) (1) En = En + En + . • The obvious solvable system is the harmonic oscillator: 1 ~2 d2 ˆ + kx2 . √ 2 This has energy levels En = ~ω(n+ 1 ) and wavefunctions An Hn ( αx)e−αx /2 . . H=− 2 2m dx 2 (30. Example: the quartic oscillator • Consider the quartic oscillator described by the potential V (x) = 1 kx2 +ax4 2 where a is very small and can be treated as a perturbation.2) n n all space ˆ where H (1) is the first order correction to the Hamiltonian–the perturbation. (0) (30.• The first order energy is then used to make a first order approximation to the wavefunction. 2 q where α = km ~ (30. .1) (1) where En is the nth state energy for the unperturbed (solvable) system and En is the first order correction. • The procedure is repeated to get higher and higher order approximations.

The value of the parameter which minimizes the energy. The basis for this is the variation theorem which states Etrial ≥ E. The trial energy is calculated by Etrial = R R all space ˆ ψ∗ Hψtrial dx trial ψ∗ ψtrial dx trial (30. We will not prove this theorem here.• For example. 5 2 2 4α 30. 5 4α 2 so the first order ground state energy for a quartic oscillator is √ ~ω 3 πaA2 0 + E0 ' .5) E0 = −∞ Z ∞ 2 2 A0 e−αx /2 ax4 A0 e−αx /2 dx = −∞ Z ∞ 2 2 x4 e−αx dx = aA0 √ −∞ 3 πaA2 0 = . Variational method The basic idea behind the variational method is to use a trial wavefunction with an adjustable parameter.7) 209 . Etrial .2. that we use to minimize the trial energy by setting dEtrial =0 dp (30. the ground state energy correction is then calculation from Z ∞ (1) (0)∗ ˆ (0) ψ0 H (1) ψ0 dx (30. p.6) all space The trial energy is now a function of the adjustable parameter. gives a trial wavefunction which is closest to the real wavefunction.

and solving for p. (Strictly speaking we should check that we have a minimum and not a maximum or inflection point. but with reasonably good trial functions one is pretty safe in having a minimum.) 210 .

the two level system is a close second.31. Unlike the harmonic oscillator it has no classical analogue. 211 211 . The time variable never appears in any expression. We shall finally get to quantum dynamics in this chapter. The spin system discussed above is an example of a two level system. 31. The Two Level System and Quantum Dynamics Our entire discussion of quantum mechanics thus far had dealt only with time independent quantum mechanics. but first we will discuss the very important model of the two level system.1. Obviously there are cases where quantum objects move with time. The two level system is inherently quantum mechanical in nature. firing an electron down a particle accelerator. The Two Level System If the harmonic oscillator is the most important model in all a physics. For example.

Consequently.2) where δ j.° “projects out” the j th state of the wavefunction being acted on.° + 2 δ 2. The two level system consists of two states ψ1 and ψ2 separated by energy 4 = 2 − 1 as shown below The states ψ1 and ψ2 are orthonormal: Z ψ∗ ψk dΩ = j ( 1 0 j=k . i=1 The states ψ 1 and ψ2 are eigenfunctions of the two level Hamiltonian. (31.1) TLS R where TLS dΩ means integration over the two level space (which is really just the P sum 2 ). ˆ H= 1 δ 1. j 6= k (31. we can not use our usual procedure of writing down the classical Hamiltonian and then replacing the variables with their corresponding operators.° . 212 .

° + = 1 δ 1. 2 2 (31.3) (aψ1 + bψ2 ) + (aψ1 + bψ2 ) = a 1 ψ1 + b 2ψ2 Another orthonormal set of wavefunctions are the so-called ‘left’ 1 1 ψL = √ ψ1 + √ ψ2 2 2 and ‘right’ 1 1 ψR = √ ψ1 − √ ψ2 2 2 (31.° 2 δ 2.° (31.° ) (aψ 1 + bψ2 ) 2 δ 2. then ˆ Hψ = ( 1 δ 1. We can invert above equations and solve for ψ1 and ψ2 in terms of ψL and ψR 1 1 ψ1 = √ ψL + √ ψR 2 2 and 1 1 ψ2 = √ ψL − √ ψR .7) 213 .6) (31.5) states.For example let some arbitrary wavefunction ψ = aψ 1 + bψ2 .4) (31.

What has been kept hidden up to now is the fact that the eigenfunctions are really multiplied by a phase factor of the form . 214 .10) Does this mean the eigenstates are not stationary states? To determine this we need to calculate the probability of finding the particle in the same eigenstate at some future time.11) ¯ ¯ ¯2 ¯Z ¯ ¯ i ∗ − ~ En t dx¯ = ¯ ψ n (x)ψ n (x)e ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯2 Z ¯ −iE t ¯ ∗ ¯e ~ n ψn (x)ψ n (x)dx¯ = ¯ ¯ ¯ i ¯2 ¯ ¯ = ¯e− ~ En t (1)¯ = 1. 0)Ψn (x. Quantum Dynamics So far we have been concerned with the eigenfunctions and eigenvalues (energy levels) of the various quantum systems that we have discussed. t) ∂t i ∂ψn (x)e− ~ En t i~ ∂t i ∂e− ~ En t i~ψ n (x) ¶ ∂t µ i i i~ψ n (x) − En e− ~ En t ~ i~ i ˆ = HΨn (x. This is given by ¯Z ¯2 ¯ ¯ ∗ P (x. t)dx¯ (31. t) ≡ ψn (x)e− ~ En t i (31. t) i ˆ = Hψn (x)e− ~ En t i ˆ = Hψn (x)e− ~ En t i ˆ = Hψn (x)e− ~ En t i (31. Ψn (x.31.8) We can verify this by obtaining the time independent Schrödinger equation from the more general time dependent ∂Ψn (x. t) = ¯ Ψn (x.9) ˆ En ψn (x)e− ~ En t = e− ~ En t Hψn (x) ˆ En ψn (x) = Hψ n (x) (31.2.

The “left” and “right” wavefunctions that we saw in the discussion of the two level system are examples of superposition states. The phase factor does become important for superposition states. t) 2 2 exposing the phase factors we get i i 1 1 Φ(x. As an example consider the state 1 1 Φ(x. = ¯ (31.13) Let’s now track the probability of finding the particle in the same superposition state. t) + √ Ψ2 (x. t)¯ P (x.14) i i ∗ ∗ − ~ E1 t − ~ E2 t ¯ ¯2 +ψ2 (x)ψ 1 (x)e + ψ2 (x)ψ 2 (x)e The “cross-terms” (those of the form ψ∗ (x)ψ 2 (x) and ψ ∗ (x)ψ 1 (x)) are zero when 1 2 215 . Similar to before we calculate ¯2 ¯Z ¯ ¯ ¯ Φ∗ (x. t) = √ ψ1 (x)e− ~ E1 t + √ ψ2 (x)e− ~ E2 t 2 2 (31. t) = √ Ψ1 (x. it may be in a superposition of any number of eigenstates.so no matter what time t we check we will always find the system in the same eigenstate. t) = ¯ ¯ ¯Z µ ¶¯2 ¶µ ¯ ¯ i i 1 ∗ 1 ∗ 1 1 − ~ E1 t − ~ E2 t ¯ ¯ √ ψ1 (x) + √ ψ2 (x) √ ψ1 (x)e = ¯ + √ ψ2 (x)e ¯ 2 2 2 2 ¯ Z à ! ¯2 i i ¯ ¯1 ψ ∗ (x)ψ 1 (x)e− ~ E1 t + ψ∗ (x)ψ 2 (x)e− ~ E2 t ¯ ¯ 1 1 dx¯ . 0)Φ(x.12) (31. Thus the eigenstates are stationary states. In general the state of the system need not be in one particular eigenstate.

0)Φ(x. t)¯ (31. +e +1 = = 4 2 ~ The probability of find in the system in its original superposition states is not one for all times t. 216 .15) P (x.integrated because the eigenfunctions are orthogonal. This leaves ¯2 ¯Z ¯ ¯ ¯ Φ∗ (x. t) = ¯ ¯ ¯ Z ³ ´ ¯2 ¯ ¯1 i i ∗ ∗ − ~ E1 t − ~ E2 t dx¯ ψ 1 (x)ψ 1 (x)e + ψ2 (x)ψ 2 (x)e = ¯ ¯ ¯2 ¯ µ ¶¯2 Z Z ¯1 − i E t ¯ i ∗ ∗ − ~ E2 t 1 ¯ e ~ ψ1 (x)ψ 1 (x)dx + e ψ2 (x)ψ 2 (x)dx ¯ = ¯ ¯ 2 ¯ ³ ´¯2 ´³ i ´ ³ i ¯1 − i E t ¯ i i i ¯ e ~ 1 + e− ~ E2 t ¯ = 1 e+ ~ E1 t + e+ ~ E2 t e− ~ E1 t + e− ~ E2 t = ¯ ¯ 2 4 ¶ ³ ´ 1µ i i (E1 − E2 ) 1 + ~ (E1 −E2 )t − ~ (E1 −E2 )t 1+e 1 + cos t .

The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets. ˆ hˆ i = α space (31. (31. N unnorm (31. Equations • The short cut for getting the normalization constant . The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations. y.18) 217 217 . z)|2 dxdydz.16) • The normalized wavefunction: ψnorm = 1 ψ .Key Equations for Exam 1 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 1.17) • How to get the average value for some property. This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material. Z ψ∗ αψdxdydz. sZ N= space |ψunnorm (x.

ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ L m2 h2 ~2 m2 = . j 6= k (31.23) • Commonly used comutators of the angular momentum operators are h i i i h h ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ x .20) (31.25) • The energy levels for a particle in a ring are Em = (31. ˆ y .21) ψ∗ ψk j = space 1.ny . Ly = i~Lz .27) 218 .24) L L L and h i h i h i ˆ 2 . Lz = 0. √ ny πy nz πz nx πx 2 2 sin sin . Enx . (31. 0. ˆ z .nz • Orthonormality: Z n2 h2 n2 h2 n2 h2 y x = + + z 2.26) • The normalized wavefunctions for a particle on a ring are 1 ψ = √ eimφ .• The Laplacian ∇ = 2 µ ∂2 ∂2 ∂2 + 2+ 2 ∂x2 ∂y ∂z ¶ .19) • Normalized wavefunctions for the 3D particle in a box. Lx = i~Ly (31. Lx = L2 . 8ma2 8mb2 8mc ( (31. sin ψn (x) = √ a b c abc • The energy levels for the 3D particle in a box. 2π (31. Lz = i~Lx .22) • Superpostion: ψ= X i ai ϕi (31. Ly = L2 . j=k . 2I 8π2 I (31.

ˆ L2 ψlm = l(l + 1)ψ lm • The energy levels for the rigid rotor are El = l(l + 1)~2 .• The eigenfunctions of angular momentum are entirely specified by two quantum numbers l and m: ψ lm . 2I (31. • The first order energy correction in pertubation theory is Z (1) ˆ ψ(0)∗ H (1) ψ(0) dx. t) ≡ ψn (x)e− ~ En t i (31.35) 219 .30) (31.34) (31.33) • The left and right superposition states are 1 1 ψL = √ ψ1 + √ ψ2 2 2 and 1 1 ψR = √ ψ1 − √ ψ2 2 2 (31.31) • The trial energy in variation theory is calculated by R ∗ ˆ all ψ trial Hψ trial dx space Etrial = R ∗ all ψ trial ψ trial dx space (31.32) • In general Ψn (x. En = n n all space (31.28) • Degeneracy for general angular momentum is gJ = 2J + 1.29) ˆ Lz ψlm = mψ lm (31.

Part VI Symmetry and Spectroscopy 220 220 .

Symmetry and Group Theory We now take a short break from physical chemistry to discuss ideas from the mathematical field of group theory.32. Inherent to group theory is symmetry. As far as we are concerned. • The types of symmetry it has will determine to which symmetry group it belongs. • The mathematical properties of all the possible groups have been worked out • These mathematical properties translate into a wide variety of variety of physical properties including — Bonding — Properties of wavefunctions — Vibrational modes — Many more applications 221 221 . we will • determine the symmetry of a particular molecule.

This type of operator arrises in the treatment of extended crystal structures. For molecules we will be dealing with point group symmetry operators. which has the following properties. It is a set of objects and a single operation.32. the eigenvalues for the particular symmetry operator are 1 or −1. ı ˆ An example of symmetry operator that is not a point group symmetry operator would be an operator that performed some sort of translation in space. We have seen two such operators in ˆ and σ h . The group is associative (but not necessarily communative) with respect to the operation. 2.1) This implies ˆ Oψ = ±ψ. 1.2) 32. That is. (32.1. These operators deal with symmetry about the center of mass. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout on Symmetry Elements ∗ ∗∗ (32. An identity element exits and is a member of the group 222 . Mathematical Groups In mathematics the term “group” has special meaning.2. Symmetry Operators Any operator that leaves |ψ|2 invariant are symmetry operators for that particular system: ˆ O |ψ|2 = |ψ|2 .

32. C2 . for any member of the group one can find another member of the group which. 4. Example: The C2v Group ˆ ˆ ˆ The C2v group consists of the symmetry elements E. In other words.1. the wavefunctions must be symmetric or antisymmetric with respect to all elements of the group. Water is an example of a molecule described by this point group. The inverse of every member of the group is also in the group.2. The multiplication table for the C2v group is C2v ˆ E ˆ C2 σv ˆ σ 0v ˆ ˆ E ˆ E ˆ C2 σv ˆ σ 0v ˆ ˆ C2 ˆ C2 ˆ E σ 0v ˆ σv ˆ σv ˆ σv ˆ σ 0v ˆ ˆ E ˆ C2 σ 0v ˆ σ 0v ˆ σv ˆ ˆ C2 ˆ E 32. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout on Naming Point Groups ∗ ∗∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout on Assigning Point Groups ∗ ∗∗ Associated with a given group is a “multiplication” table.3.3. upon “multiplication.” yields the identity element. 223 . Symmetry of Functions In the absence of degeneracy. The “product” of any two members of the group yield a member of the group. σ v (in-plane) and σ 0v ˆ (transverse).

−1. 1) A2 = (1. 1. −1. As it turns out there is four possible sets of eigenvalues–hence four different vectors: A1 = (1. consider the following. ˆ — This restriction forces the eigenvalues of σv and σ 0v to be the same for ˆ the A type vectors and opposite for the B type vectors. ˆ • The first value has to be +1 since the only eigenvalue of E is 1 ˆ • The eigenvalue of C2 can be +1 or −1 — When it is +1 the vectors are labelled A — When it is −1 the vectors are labelled B • The eigenvalue of σ v can be either +1 or −1 ˆ — When it is +1 the vectors are labelled with a subscript 1 — When it is −1 the vectors are labelled with a subscript 2 • The eigenvalue of σ 0v can be either +1 or −1 ˆ • Finally there is a restriction do to the fact that the eigenvalues must obey the group multiplication table. 1. 1). 224 . In this case one can collect the eigenvalues (either +1 or −1) for each of the four symmetry operators as a four component vector. To see where these four vectors come from. −1) B2 = (1. −1) B1 = (1.Connecting with the C2v group example lets consider the wavefunctions for water. −1. 1. 1. −1.

4) (32.3) 32.) ⊗ (y1 . there will always be the same number of vectors as symmetry elements.1. . 1. x3 . 1. y2 . . x2 . 225 .) For the example of the C2v group consider B1 ⊗ B2 = (1.4. x3 y3 . −1) = A2 (32. . . These vectors make up the : C2v A1 A2 B1 B2 ˆ E ˆ C2 σv ˆ σ 0v ˆ 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 −1 1 −1 1 −1 1 −1 −1 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout on Character Tables ∗ ∗∗ 32. −1. Direct Products The direct product of a two vectors is defined as (x1 . y3 . . . 1) = (1. Altogether. −1) ⊗ (1.3. In fact. . . x2 y2 . −1.The above considerations leave four vectors. Symmetry Breaking and Crystal Field Splitting We shall investigate how degeneracies of energy levels are broken as one reduces the overall symmetry of the system. −1. the vectors represent what is call an irreducible representation of the group.) = (x1 y1 . . −1.

P. First consider a free atom. For example placed at the center of a cube which has other atoms at the centers of each face of the cube. F. The S vector has the symmetry of a sphere (x2 + y 2 + z 2 ) and hence is totally symmetric. The P vector is triply degenerate and has the symmetry of x. consider only proper rotations (Cn ). 5 for D and so on as is familiar to us already. It is also nondegenerate so it will be. Now consider the free atom being placed in a crystal lattice of octahedral symmetry. etc. D. 3 for P.In doing this we will. Mirror symmetry will not be considered (although in real applications one must consider all symmetry). 226 . Thus the symmetry group is the spherical group (see character table handout.) This is the group associated with the particle on a sphere model and the angular part of the hydrogen atom. It remains totally symmetric so it is now represented by the vector A1 . y and z as we see from the character table for the spherical group. In the octahedral crystal the degeneracy remains in tact and these states are represented by the T1 group. for simplicity. The degeneracies of these vectors are 1 for S. When moving to octahedral symmetry we now must look at the character table for such a case–the O group (remember we are considering only proper rotations). nondegenerate in the octahedral case. of course. The vectors are the labeled according to the angular momentum quantum numbers S. In this case there is complete rotational symmetry.

The triply degenerate T1 vector splits into a A2 state and a doubly degenerate E state. Looking at the table for the O group we see the degeneracy splits: two states become E type and the remaining three become T2 type. xz. Lets say that two atoms on opposite sides of the cube are moved slightly inward. The octahedral group is still highly symmetric. Now the A1 vector of the O group becomes the A1 vector of the D4 group. 227 . xy. yz. z(x2 − y 2 ). The T1 states from the O group become a A2 type state and a E type state. x2 − y 2 . three becoming T1 and three becoming T2 .The D vector has a degeneracy of five and the symmetry of 2z 2 − x2 − y 2 . yz 2 . In an octahedral environment the states split with one becoming A2 . The remaining four atoms remain in place. xyz. This breaks the octahedral symmetry and the system now assumes D4 symmetry. x(x2 − 3y 2 ) and y(3x2 − y 2 ). The F states have a degeneracy of 7 and the symmetry of z 3 . The T2 states from the O group become a B2 and a E type state. This is not readily apparent from the character tables so one needs to inspect a little harder to see it (see homework). xz 2 . The E states from the O group become a A1 type state and a B1 type state.

in this chapter we simply investigate some of the specific details regarding polyatomic molecules. 33.33. To do so we begin with the 3N nuclear degrees of freedom. Molecular Vibrations As for diatomic molecules. As for the diatomic case 3 degrees of freedom determine the center of mass motion. • For linear molecules there are 2 rotational degrees of freedom • For nonlinear molecules there are 3 rotational degrees of freedom This now leaves one with 3N − 5 vibrational degrees of freedom for linear polyatomic molecules and 3N − 6 vibrational degrees of freedom for nonlinear molecules. So. One must now consider two different types of polyatomic molecules: Linear and Nonlinear. 228 228 . Molecules and Symmetry From our chapter on diatomic molecules last semester we have learned a great deal which caries over directly to polyatomic molecules. it is convenient to work with center of mass coordinates. That leaves us with 3N − 3 coordinates to specify. With polyatomic molecules one needs to specify the coordinates of N nuclei rather than just two nuclei.1.

229 . At low energies the normal modes are well approximated as harmonic oscillators. the symmetric stretching vibration and the asymmetric stretch.1. however.33. that motion is some linear combination of fundamental vibrational motions called normal modes. One example was the “left” and “right” states of the two level system. This is analogous to writing an arbitrary wavefunction as a linear combination of eigenfunctions. The three modes are the bending vibration. Normal Modes and Group Theory The symmetry of the normal modes are associated with entries in the character table of the point group of any particular polyatomic molecule. Regardless of what type of vibrational motion is taking place.1. Example: Water The point group symmetry of the water molecule is C2v . 33. Normal Modes Polyatomic molecules can undergo very complicated vibrational motion.1. The character table is C2v A1 A2 B1 B2 ˆ E ˆ C2 σv ˆ σ 0v ˆ 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 −1 1 −1 1 −1 1 −1 −1 1 Water has three nuclei and it is nonlinear so it has 3(3) − 6 = 3 normal modes.2. The number of normal modes equals the number of vibrational degrees of freedom.

ˆ 230 . ˆ The asymmetric stretch. It too is associated with A1 . Consequently the bending mode is associated with A1 The same is true for the symmetric stretching mode.The normal modes are associated with a particular vector (row) of the character table by considering the action of the each of the symmetry elements on the normal mode. is associated with B1 since C2 and σ0v transform ˆ the mode into its opposite and σ v leaves it unchanged. the vibration is complete unchanged by any of the symmetry elements. For the bending mode. however.

The electric dipole approximation • Molecule is viewed as a collection of charges • Multipole expansion monopole + dipole + quadrapole+ · · · 231 231 (34. in particular.34. Vibrational Spectroscopy and Group Theory We now investigate how group theory and.1. As for electronic absorption one typically employs the electric dipole approximation. This is in the Infrared region of the electromagnetic spectrum. IR Spectroscopy IR absorption is exactly the same as regular electronic absorption except the frequency of the electromagnetic radiation is much less. the character tables can be used to determine IR and Raman spectra and selection rules for polyatomic molecules 34. The typical “energies” for IR absorption are from 400 to 4000 cm−1 .1) .

• Light—matter interaction is dominated by the light—dipole coupling so the other interactions are ignored. The electric dipole is μ = μx ex + μy ey + μz ez where μx = qx. 232 . The upshot of all this is as far as group theory is concerned is the following selection rule: • The vibrational coordinates for an IR active transition must have the same symmetry as either x. The character table is C2v A1 A2 B1 B2 ˆ E ˆ C2 σv ˆ σ 0v ˆ Functions (34. Example: Water Recall that the point group symmetry of the water molecule is C2v . it must be able to couple to a changing (oscillating) electric dipole. μz = qz. y 2 . μy = qy. or z for the particular group.2) 1 1 1 1 z. We now need a column of the character table which we have ignored up to this point. x2 . In order for absorption of the electromagnetic radiation to take place. xz 1 −1 −1 1 y. yz The last column describes the symmetry of several important functions for the point group. y. z 2 1 1 −1 −1 xy 1 −1 1 −1 x.

The light loses energy to the material in an amount equal to the vibrational energy of the molecules is the sample. So we can see immediately that the IR active modes of any molecule having this point group will be A1 . 233 . and z. From before we know the modes of water have A1. The A2 mode is IR forbidden and any vibrations having this symmetry will not appear in the IR spectrum (or it may appear as a very weak line). Unlike IR absorption which is based on the electric dipole. and B1 symmetry and hence are all IR active and appear in the IR spectrum 34. Raman scattering is based on the polarizability of the molecule Roughly speaking the polarizability of a molecule determines how the electron density is distorted through interaction with an electromagnetic field. Raman Spectroscopy Raman spectroscopy is somewhat different than IR spectroscopy in that vibrational frequencies are measured by way of inelastic scattering of high frequency (usually visible) light.2. y.Among these functions are x. B1 . This lose of energy shows up in the scattered light as a new down shifted frequency from that of the original input light frequency. and B2 .

xy. α. y 2 . xz. We will not get into tensors in this course except to say the polarizability tensor elements are proportional to the quadratic functions. z 2 .The molecular quantity of interest is the polarizability tensor. all modes are Raman active Rule of Mutual exclusion • Vibrational mode can be both IR and Raman active or inactive • If. For the example of water. (or any combinations thereof). x2 . ↔ 234 . One can now inspect the character table to determine which modes will be Raman active. yz. however. the molecule has inversion symmetry (contains ˆ as a symmetry ı element) then no modes will be both IR and Raman active.

We now turn our attention to the angular components to describe rotations.6) .5) (35. It is common to define Be ≡ as the rotational constant. = 2μR2 8π 2 I (35.35.3) This is the so-called rigid rotor energy. The R was involved in vibrations. 2I Now.4) (35. θ.1) R 2μ 2μR2 ∂R ∂R 2μ We will now be concerned only with the angular part. under the Born-Oppenheimer approximation. Recall also the Kinetic energy operator for the nuclei in the center of mass coordinates 2 2 ~2 ˆ2 ∂ ˆ2 ∂ ˆN = − ~ ∇2 = − ~ ˆN T + J . φ). For constant R the rotational energy is given by − Erot = J(J + 1)~2 J(J + 1)h2 . R is a parameter.2) J . Molecular Rotations Recall that the three degrees of freedom that described the position of the nuclei about the center of mass were (R. (35. ~2 ˆ2 (35. Then Erot = J(J + 1)hBe with a degeneracy of gJ = 2J + 1 235 235 h 8π 2 I (35.

Relaxing the rigid rotor Of course the rigid rotor is not a perfectly correct model for a diatomic molecule.1. (35.35. • This is corrected for by the term −J 2 (J + 1)2 Dc . Rotational Spectroscopy A rotational transition can occur in the same vibrational level n. Centrifugal stretching: • Rotation tends to stretch the diatomic distance R.7) 2 where αe is an empirical rotational—vibrational interaction constant. Vibrational state dependence: • The R value is dependent on the particular vibrational level.8) (35. There are two corrections we will now make 1. This is called a pure rotational transition.2. ¶ µ 1 Bn ≡ Be − n + αe . where Dc ≡ 3 4Be ω2 ˜e (35. In either case the selection rule for the transition is 4J = ±1. 236 . a rotational transition can accompany a vibrational transition. • One defines a rotational interaction constant that depends on the vibrational level.9) is the centrifugal stretching constant. n. 2. Alternatively. 35.

The total moment of inertia. This means that at room temperature the many excited rotational states are populated. The principle axes coordinate system is the one in which the z-axis is taken to be along the principle symmetry axis. kT. at room temperature is about 200 cm−1 . But one system is special–the principle axes coordinate system. Thermal energy. I = Ixx + Iyy + Izz The Hamiltonian in the principle axes system is # " ˆ2 ˆ2 ˆ2 Jy ~2 Jx Jz ˆ + + H= 2 Ixx Iyy Izz (35.3. Rotation of Polyatomic Molecules There are a few additional details regarding rotations for polyatomic molecules as compared to diatomics Of course one could set-up an arbitrary center of mass coordinate system. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout ∗ ∗∗ 35. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout ∗ ∗∗ The selection rules and the thermalized states combine to yield a multi-peaked ro-vibrational spectrum.It turns out that typical rotational energy gaps are on the order of a few wavenumbers or less.10) 237 .

.12) ~2 ˆ2 ˆ J H= 2Ixx (35.14) • The rotational energy is Erot = hBJ(J + 1) + h(A − B)K 2 .17) B= 2 8π Ixx and K is the quantum number describing the projection of the angular momentum onto the z-axis 238 .. benzene) • Ixx = Iyy h 8π2 Ixx (35.g.13) ˆ ˆ2 ˆ2 ˆ2 • J 2 = Jx + Jy + Jz • The Hamiltonian is # " ˆ2 ˆ2 ˆ2 ~2 Jx + Jy Jz ˆ + H= 2 Ixx Izz (35. Linear (e. (35.16) 8π 2 Izz h (35. Symmetric tops (e. where B= 2.g.11) (35.There are four classes of polyatomic molecules regarding rotations 1.15) h . where A= (35. Ixx = Iyy ˆ ˆ2 ˆ2 • J 2 = Jx + Jy • The Hamiltonian is • The rotational energy is Erot = hBJ(J + 1). carbon dioxide) • Izz = 0.

g.18) (35.19) ~2 ˆ2 ˆ J H= 2Ixx (35.3. Asymmetric tops • Ixx 6= Iyy 6= Izz • These are more complicated and we will not discuss them in detail 239 .20) 4. methane) • Ixx = Iyy = Izz ˆ ˆ2 ˆ2 ˆ2 • J 2 = Jx + Jy + Jz • The Hamiltonian is • The rotational energy is Erot = hBJ(J + 1).. where B= h 8π2 Ixx (35. Spherical tops (e.

Electronic Spectroscopy of Molecules The electronic spectra of molecules are quite different than that of atoms. have numerous lines (bands) due to the fact that electronic transitions are accompanied by vibrational and rotational transitions. Atomic spectra consist of single sharp lines due to transitions between energy levels. The Structure of the Electronic State Last semester we saw that under the Born—Oppenheimer approximation we were able to write the molecular wavefunction as a product of an electronic part and a nuclear part. was parameterized by the internuclear distance.1. Molecular spectra.36. on the other hand. R. 36. 240 240 . Ee . Ee as a function of R describe the effective potential for the nuclei. We found that in doing so the electronic energy level. It had a qualitative shape similar to the Morse potential.

∗ ∗ ∗ See Spectroscopy Supplement p1 ∗ ∗∗ 36.In the figure below the ground and first excited electronic levels (as a function of R) are shown. light demotes an electron from the ground vibrational state of the excited electronic state to any one of a number of excited vibrational levels in the ground electronic state.1.2. Emission Spectra In emission spectroscopy.1.1. 36. 241 . Note: The potential minima are not at the same value of R for each of the electronic states. Absorption Spectra In absorption spectroscopy. light promotes an electron from the ground electronic state (and usually from the ground vibrational state too) to the excited electronic state and any of the excited vibrational states of the excited electronic state.

the process of is taking place. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Spectroscopy Supplement p3 ∗ ∗∗ As seen in the supplement the fluorescence spectrum is shifted to lower energies (red shifted) from the absorption spectrum. This is known as the Stokes shift.∗ ∗ ∗ See Spectroscopy Supplement p2 ∗ ∗∗ 36. • The system then very rapidly (on the order of tens to hundreds of femtoseconds) relaxes to the ground vibrational state of the excited electronic state. The main stream explanation for the stokes shift is as follows • Light promotes the system from the ground vibrational and ground electronic state to excited vibrational levels in the excited electronic state. Fluorescence Spectra All during the process of absorption. 242 .3. Hence the Stokes shift.1. • This process is called • The molecule than emits a photon to drop back down into an excited vibrational state of the ground electronic state. • This requires a lower energy (or “more red”) photon.

i ¯ .2.f is given by ¯Z ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯2 ¯Z ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Ψ∗ μel Ψi ¯ = ¯ ˆ f ¯ ¯ Z ¯2 ¯ ¯ ψ∗ ψ∗ μel ψel.i ψvib.f ψvib.i → Ψf = ψel. one obtains the Franck—Condon principle. Franck—Condon activity We have seen than an electronic tranistion involves not only a change in the electronic state but also in the vibrational state in general (and in the rotaitonal state as well.i ψvib.1) all space el space vib space 243 .f ¯ (36.f vib. The Franck—Condon principle When the Born—Oppenheimer approximation is applied to spectroscopic transitions. Assuming the electronic transition is allowed one must calculate the probability of the vibrational transistion as well. Mathematically this means that the strength of a transition from Ψi = ψel. 36. ˆ el.2. The Franck—Condon principle states that the nuclei do not move during an electronic transition. but we will ingore this).36. This is down by evaulating the Franck—Condon integral. Physically this means that for a particular transition to be Franck—Condon active there must be good overlap of the vibrational wavefunctions involved in the transition.1.

We can separate the integrals as ˆ ¯2 ¯Z ¯2 ¯Z ¯¯ ¯ ¯ ¯¯ ¯ ¯ ∗ ∗ ψel.f ψvib.i ¯ .f μel ψel.where μel is the electronic transition dipole.2) ¯ ¯ ¯ vib ¯ ¯ el space space | {z }| {z } if 6=0. allowed Franck—Condon 244 .i ¯ ¯ ˆ ψvib. (36.

and is given by Z ∞ ˜(ω) = = [f (t)] = f f(t)eiωt dt. by denoted ˜ by a tilde.1. One should be familiar with qualitative aspects of this time—frequency relation. such as if a signal oscillates in time it will have a peak in it frequency spectrum at the frequency with which it is oscillating.1) −∞ 245 245 . in this work. if the signal decays slowly it will have a narrow spectrum. The Fourier transformation The Fourier transformation. f (ω). of a function f (t) will. conversely. Spectroscopic data is obtained either in the time domain or in the frequency domain and one should readily be able to look at data in one domain and know what is happening in the other domain. Fourier Transforms As a spectroscopist it is imperative to have a deep understanding of the relationship between time and frequency. if the signal decays rapidly it will have a broad spectrum and. The mathematics which governs these qualitative statements is Fourier transform theory which we now review. (37. =.37. 37. Furthermore.

so one must take care to know exactly which convention is being used.e. = f(ω) = f(t). f (ω) = f (t) = 2π −∞ The above two relations form the convention used throughout this work. i. = [f (t)] = f (ω).e. 246 . =−1 . which is given by Z ∞ h i 1 −1 ˜ ˜ = (37. i.. Other authors use different conventions. For simplicity the symbol = will be used to represent the Fourier transformation ˜ operation..The Fourier transformation is unique and it has a unique inverse. Whereas the symbol =−1 will represent the inverse h i −1 ˜ Fourier transformation.2) f(ω)e−iωt dω.

247 247 (37. Equations • Vibrational degrees of freedom — linear: 3N − 5 — not linear: 3N − 6 • The so-called rigid rotor energy is Erot = J(J + 1)hBe . This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material.4) . The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations.3) h 8π 2 I (37. The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets.Key Equations for Exam 2 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 2. where Be ≡ is the rotational constant.

6) • The Fourier transformation is ˜ = [f (t)] = f (ω) = f (t)eiωt dt.8) 248 .5) vib space (37.7) −∞ • The inverse Fourier transformation is Z ∞ h i 1 −1 ˜ ˜ = f(ω)e−iωt dω.f ¯ Z ∞ (37.• The degeneracy of the rigid rotor is gJ = 2J + 1 • Franck—Condon Factor: ¯Z ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯2 ¯ ¯ ψ∗ ψvib. (37. f (ω) = f (t) = 2π −∞ (37.i ¯ vib.

Part VII Kinetics and Gases 249 249 .

The velocities of the particles are characterized by a probability distribution function for velocities F (vx . hence a momentum of p = mv and a kinetic energy of KE = 1 mv · v = 1 mv 2 . m is the molecular (or atomic) mass • Each particle of mass m has velocity v. vzi ). vy . vyi . dzi . t. y. vz . This can represented in velocity space by dt dt dt dt the vector vi = (vxi . V (L is Avogadro’s number): Consider the ith particle at position xi = (x. z) in coordinate (position) space. dyi . Physical Kinetics We now turn our attention to the molecular level and in particular to molecular motion. t) which is in general a function of time.1. 250 250 . ¡ ¢ Its velocity is vi = dxi = dxi . 2 2 • A sample of N molecules is characterized by its number density n∗ = • From the ideal gas law P V = nRT = N PL = RT = n∗ V N RT L N . 38. kinetic theory of gases A microscopic view of gases Consider a gas of point mass (m).38.

then for many cases the velocity distribution will be isotropic–independent of θ and φ.. θ. φ. φ). Vv . F (v. θ. t). t) = F (v. NVv . θ. vy . v is simply a magnitude (not a vector)–it is the speed. t)dvx dvy dvz (38.1) Vv Vv It is more convenient to switch to spherical polar coordinates in velocity space (v. The probability distribution function then becomes F (v.b. in velocity space is Z Z Z Z NVv = N F (v. θ. (38. t) = F (v.2) Furthermore. φ. φ). φ. n. F (v. stationary distributions–those independent of time–are often encountered.The number of particles. t) If we choose the origin of our coordinate system to be at the center of mass of the gas. θ. t)dv = N F (vx .3) 251 . vz . having velocities in a macroscopic volume. (38.

This is the Maxwell’s distribution (of speeds). n = = RT .4) 2πkb T where kb = 1.5) 2πkT 0 0 s r µ ¶ 8kT L Lk=R 8RT = = πm L Lm=M πM It will be convenient to define number density as n∗ ≡ N where N is the number V N P nRT LP ∗ of particles.2. It can be shown from first principles that µ ¶3 2 −mv 2 m F (v) = 4π e 2kb T v 2 (38.We shall consider stationary isotropic distributions F (v).380658 × 10−23 is Boltzmann’s constant. So F (v) represents a distribution of speeds. Molecular Collisions The average speed of a particle can calculated from Maxwell’s distribution: Z ∞ Z ∞ m 3 − mv2 ) 2 e 2kT dv hvi = v = ¯ vF (v)dv = v 3 4π( (38. For an ideal gas (V = P ). n RT |{z} =L A simple model for molecular collisions: 252 . 38.

• Particles are hard spheres of radius σ.7) From the above expression one defines the mean free path λ to be v ¯ / λ= √ 2n∗ πσ 2/ v ¯ LP n∗ = RT = RT √ 2P Lπσ 2 (38. v12 = h|v1 − v2 |i ¯ It can be shown that r v12 = ¯ √ √ collision 16RT = 2¯ =⇒ v = 2n∗ πσ 2 v . ¯ πM frequency (38. frequency λ = 72. ∗ ∗ ∗ See Handout ∗ ∗∗ • The number of collisions equals the number of particles with their centers in V : number of collisions = n∗ πσ 2 v4t (38. • A Particle moving at v sweeps out a cylinder of radius σ and length v4t =⇒ V = πσ2 v4t. P = 1 bar): v = 380.25 × 109 s−1 .5 nm 253 . s collision = 5.6) • The collision frequency = n∗ πσ 2 v For the above model we need to find the average collision frequency.48 ¯ m . Since the molecules are moving relative to one another we must find the average relative velocity.8) Example: Ar at SATP (T = 298 K.

equal b.2) − dt dt dt dt BUT this is ambiguous because a moles of A reacts with b moles of B and a does not.1. address the question. Rate Laws Consider a general four component reaction aA + bB = cC + dD (39. in general. answer the question: How fast will the reaction occur? 39. from thermodynamics. We must account for the stoichiometry.1) The time dependence of this reaction can be observed by following the disappearance of either of the reactants or appearance of either of the products.39. d[B] d[C] d[D] d[A] or − or or (39. That is. Will the reaction occur? We need kinetics. The Rate Laws of Chemical Kinetics Thermodynamics described chemical systems in equilibrium. We can. however. For this we turn to the field of chemical kinetics. 254 254 . For the study of chemical reactions it is important understand systems that can be very far from equilibrium.

or D. (39. In general an overall reaction is made up of so called elementary reactions Reactant Reactant = → Product overall rxn (39. −b. but certainly not all.6) The reaction is said to be of order xAi in species Ai and it is of overall order P i xA i . v = f (conc. rate laws are empirical.4) 0 B0 → c0 C0 + d0 D0 b A rate law is the mathematical statement of how the reaction velocity depends on concentration. B. C.3) where vi = −a. Many. rate laws are of the form v = k[A1 ]xA 1 [A2 ]xA 2 · · · [An ]xA n . This definition is useful but must be used with caution since for complicated reactions all the v’s may not be equal. An example of this is ½ bB → cC + dD aA + (39. c or d and I = A.5) For the most part.We define the reaction velocity as v= 1 d[I] vi dt (39.7) Intermediates → Product Note that we shall use an equal sign when talking about the overall reaction and arrows when talking about the elementary reactions Example 255 .) (39.

(39.9) where kf is the rate constant for the reaction to proceed in the forward direction and kr is the rate constant for the reaction to proceed in the reverse direction. Trimolecular A + A + A → Product v = k[A]3 Trimolecular A + A + B → Product v = k[A]2 [B] Trimolecular A + B + C → Product v = k[A][B][C] Conversely. Connection to thermodynamics Consider the overall or elementary reaction aA + bB ­ cC + dD kr kf (39.10) 256 . rate laws for overall reactions can not be determined by stoichiometry.8) The rate laws for elementary reactions can be determined from the stoichiometry molecularity elementary rxn rate law Unimolecular A → Product v = k[A] Bimolecular A + A → Product v = k[A]2 Bimolecular A + B → Product v = k[A][B] . One possible set of elementary steps could be elementary rxn A + A → A0 A00 + 2B→ C + D A0 → A00 molecularity Bimolecular Unimolecular Trimolecular .Let 2A + 2B = C + D be the overall reaction. at equilibrium vf = vb which implies kf [A]a [B]b = kr [C]c [D]d (39. Now.

11) So. H2 + I2 = 2HI. Moral: Kinetics is very much an empirical science. Objectives of chemical kinetics 257 . the reaction is not elementary.” (39. In fact. (39. The above two example are seemingly very similar but they have very different observed rate laws.12) The observed rate laws are vf = kf [H2 ][I2 ] and vr = kr [HI]2 . The velocity of a reaction is lost in this ratio and hence we still can not determine the speed of a reaction from thermodynamics. Next consider the reaction between molecular hydrogen and molecular bromine. H2 + Br2 = 2HBr. we have succeeded in connecting thermodynamics to kinetics BUT we have done so through the ratio of rate constants. Examples of rate laws Consider the (overall) reaction between molecular hydrogen and molecular iodine. This suggests that the reaction is elementary. The observed rate law for this reaction is very complicated.13) . Moral: Kinetics is very much an empirical science. this does not obey any common form.bringing kr to the LHS and [A][B] to the RHS we get [C]c [D]d kf 0 = = Kc a [B]b kr [A] 0 where Kc is the thermodynamic equilibrium “constant. v= k[H2 ][Br2 ]1/2 1+ k0 [HBr] [Br2 ] (39.

258 . • For medium reactions (min) either a continuous monitoring technique or a stopping technique can be used — A stopping technique used rapid cooling or destruction of the catalysts to stop a reaction at a given point.• To establish empirical rate laws • To determine mechanisms of overall reactions • To empirically study elementary reactions • To establish theoretical links to statistical mechanics and quantum mechanics — This involve nonequilibrium thermodynamics–more difficult • To study chemical reaction dynamics — the dynamics of molecular collisions that result in reactions 39. Determination of Rate Laws Concentrations c(t) are measured not rates. • Very fast (sec/subsec) reactions cause problems because the reaction goes faster than one can mix the reactants. Consequently no one experimental technique can be used. To obtain the rate from the concentration we must take its time derivative dc(t) . The rates of chemical reactions vary enormously from sub-seconds to years. That is we must measure c(t) as a dt function of time and find the rate of change of this concentration curve.2. • For slow reactions (hrs/days) almost any technique for measuring the concentration can be used.

• initially v0 = kax by where a and b are the initial concentrations of A and B respectively • taking the log of both sides gives lnv0 = ln[kax by ] = ln k + x ln a + y ln b • a and b can be varied independently so both x and y can be determined. this gives the overall order of x + y • flood with. say. A so v ≈ kax [B]y 39. The differential equation is not solved. 1. Integrated rate laws The above differential methods look directly at the rate law which is a differential equation. if there is an induction period 2.39.2.2. Method of isolation • for v = k[A]x [B]y rate laws • start with initial concentrations a and b equal to the stoichometry. The main problem with such a method is that randomness in the concentration measurements gets amplified when taking the derivative.1. • problems 1. Method of initial velocities • for v = k[A]x [B]y rate laws.2. if the concentration drops very sharply 2. 259 . Differential methods based on the rate law Methods based directly on the rate law rely on the determination of the time derivative of the concentration.

b. b) The order need not be an integer. type rate lawa) integrated rate lawa) 1st order 2nd order nth orderb) 1 vi 1 vi 1 vi 1 vi d[I] dt d[I] dt d[I] dt d[I] dt = k[I] = k[I]2 = k[I]n [I] = [I0 ]evi kt 1 = [I10 ] − vi kt [I] 1 [I]n−1 = 1 [I0 ]n−1 k[I] enyzme = km +[I] km ln [I0 ] + ([I0 ] − [I]) = −vi kt [I] a) [I] is the concentration of one of the reactants in an elementary reaction and vi is the stoichiometric factor for [I] (n. vi is a negative number). For example n = 3/2 is a three-halves order rate law. The differential equations (rate law) and their solutions (integrated rate law) are simply listed here for a few rate laws.We now solve the differential equations to yield what are called the integrated rate law. − (n − 1)vi kt 260 ..

3) (A is the constant of integration). Integration of the above yields ln k = ln A − Ea Ea =⇒ k = Ae− RT RT (40. kr (40. d(1/T ) R where Ea is the Arrhenious activation energy. Temperature Effects on Rate Constants An empirical rate constant was proposed by Arrhenious: Ea d ln k = or dT RT 2 Ea d ln k = . Temperature and Chemical Kinetics 40.1) (40.40.2) (40.4) Now. ln Ka = ln kr ∙ 261 261 (40.5) . This is the Arrhenious equation Recall the equilibrium constant can also be obtained from kinetics 0 Kc = kf ' Ka . take the log of this: ¸ kf = ln kf − ln kr .1.

Temperature corrections to the Arrhenious parameters The Arrhenious parameters A and Ea are constants.10) 40. Theoretical approaches to reaction rates predict rate constants of the form k = aT j e−E /RT .1.8) (40. k = Ae− RT = aT j ej e− Ea E 0 +jRT RT = aT j ej e/ e RT = aT j e RT / −j −E 0 −E 0 √ (40.1. Theory of Reaction Rates Simple collision theory (SCT) • Bimolecular reactions (A.7) (40.B) • Reaction rate determined by molecular collisions 262 .2.6) (40. Forcing this to coincide with the Arrhenious implies Ea = E 0 + jRT and A = aT j ej 0 (40.9) We can verify this by starting with the Arrhenious equation and substituting the above expressions.Substituting the Arrhenious equation for the rate constants gives ¸ ∙ i h Ea Ear f − RT − ln Ar e− RT ln Ka = ln Af e ∙ ¸ Ear − Eaf Af = ln + Ar RT 40.

13) [A][B] = pπσ AB L s 8RT − Em in e RT πLμ (40. • The maximum reaction velocity is vmax = reaction velocity will be less because zA B L .— Collision frequency for A–B collisions s 8RT zAB = πσ AB L2 [A][B] πLμ where μ ≡ mA mB mA +mB (40.14) 263 .12) • The rate constant for a bimolecular reaction is v k= [A][B] so SCT predicts k= pzA B e− L Em in RT (40. but intuitively the actual — the ability to react depends on orientation =⇒ a steric factor p — a minimum amount of collisional energy is required=⇒ e−Em in /RT • The actual reaction velocity is pzAB e− v= L Em in RT (40.11) is the reduced mass and σAB is the collision diameter.

ACT is not limited to bimolecular reactions. • For the above example. A + B → (AB)‡ → products.• Comparison to the (temperature corrected) Arrhenious equation suggests s 8RT 1 e2 (40.17) • The active complex is a state in the thermodynamic sense.15) A = pπσ AB L πLμ and 1 Ea = Emin + RT 2 (40.g. (40..18) 264 . e. the equilibrium constant is defined as ‡ Ka = a‡ low [‡] ' aA aB conc. [A][B] (40. thus we can apply thermodynamics to it.16) Activated complex theory (ACT) • An intermediate active complex is formed during the reaction.

h (40.• Definition: transmission factor. Reactions may occur in series or in parallel or both.19) • Thermodynamics tells us that ‡ 4G‡ = −RT ln Ka (40. — From statistical mechanics. • The reaction rate constant for reactants going to products for ACT is ‡ k = f Ka = kb T ‡ K h a (40. • The ACT reaction rate constant now becomes k= This is Eyring’s equation kb T − 4H ‡ 4S‡ e RT e R .21) where 4G‡ = 4H ‡ − T 4S ‡ . Parallel reactions: 265 . Multistep Reactions Up to now.3. the reactions we have studied have been single step reactions. f — accounts for the fraction of activated complex that becomes product. there is many steps from initial reactants to final products. in what is called a reaction network.22) 40.20) which can be written as ‡ Ka = e− 4G‡ RT = e− 4H ‡ RT e 4S ‡ R (40. In general. it can be shown that f = kb T /h where kb is Boltzmann’s constant and h is Planck’s constant.

• Parallel reactions are of the form. B and C are determined by the system of differential equations: − d[A] = k1 [A] dt d[B] = k1 [A] − k2 [B] dt d[C] = k2 [B].23) A + B2 → D • The rate constant for the disappearance of [A] is simply the sum of the two rate constants: k = k1 + k2 k2 Series reactions: • Series reactions necessarily include and intermediate product. 1 A + B1 → C k (40. dt which. for example. They are of the form k1 k2 A→B→C (40.24) • The concentrations of A. when solved yields [A] = [A0 ]e−k1 t ¢ k1 [A0 ] ¡ −k1 t [B] = − ek2 t e k2 − k1 ¶ µ k2 e−k1 t − k1 ek2 t [C] = [A0 ] − [A] − [B] = [A0 ] 1 − k2 − k1 • See in class animation 266 .

Chain Reactions Chain reactions are reactions which have at least one step that is repeated indefinitely. 267 .4. The simplest chain reactions have three distinct steps (discussed below) Chain reactions are extremely important in polymer chemistry Steps of a chain reaction 1. Initiation: Typically a molecule M reacts to form some highly reactive radical M → R·.40.

2. 3. Termination: The radicals interact with each other or with the walls of the container to forma stable molecule R0 ·+R0 · → M000 or R0 ·+wall → removed 268 . R·+M0 → M00 + R0 ·. Propagation: The radical formed in the initiation step reacts with some so molecule M0 to form another molecule M00 and another radical R0 ·. This step repeats an indefinite number of times.

4) Vm − b Vm where the parameter a accounts for the attractive forces among the particles and parameter b accounts for the repulsive forces among the particles P = 269 269 . a particular particle has much less significant interactions with the other particles.1) (41.2) • The van der Waals gas equation of state P = or n2 a nRT − 2 V − nb V (41. This simplifies the theoretical treatment of gases.1. nRT m V (41.3) a RT − 2. Equations of State Recall from last semester several of the equations of states for gases. • The ideal gas equation of state P V = nRT. 41. The equation of state can also be expressed in term of density ρ = ρ= mP .41. (41. Gases and the Virial Series Unlike liquids and solids. We will now look in detail at the gases.

+ ··· . RT • z is unity for an ideal gas because for such a gas P V = nRT. • z can be expended in a power series called the virial series. C(T ).9) B(T ).7) 41. etc.6) • Redlich-Kwang P = (41. The Virial Series Definition: Compressibility Factor: z = PV nRT = P Vm . n • For a real gas z must approach unity upon dilution ( V → 0).• Berthelot • Dieterici P = nRT n2 a a RT − − = 2 2 V − nb T V Vm − b T Vm an a (41. (41.8) ³n´ 1 z = 1 + B(T ) Vm ¶ 1 + C(T ) Vm 1 + D(T ) Vm (41.2. The virial series in powers of z = 1 + B(T ) or µ V n V is + C(T ) µ ³ n ´2 V ¶2 + D(T ) µ ³ n ´3 V ¶3 +··· . Conceptually B(T ) represents pair-wise interaction of the particles. are called the virial coefficients.5) RT e− RT Vm nRT e− RT V = P = V − nb Vm − b nRT n2 a a RT −√ −√ = V − nb Vm − b T V (V − nb) T Vm (Vm − b) (41. etc. 270 . C(T ) represents triplet interactions.

12) The first term is of the form 1 1−x 1 = 1 + x + x2 + · · · .11) = z so z= 1 a − . (41.41.2. b RT Vm 1 − Vm which has the power series expansion (41. RT Vm Vm (41. hence 1 Vm µ b Vm ¶2 + ··· . (41. C(t) = b2 .13) (41.1.14) 1 Vm and so it can be combined with the term µ ¶2 ³ a ´ 1 b z =1+ b− + + ··· . etc. Relation to the van der Waals Equation of State Recall the van der Waals equation P = multiply both sides by Vm RT a RT − 2 Vm − b Vm (41.10) to get V / a /T Vm R / P Vm = − m / 2 RT R / Vm − b RT Vm /T a Vm − = Vm − b RT Vm 1 a = − b RT Vm 1 − Vm but P Vm RT (41. 1−x Therefore b a +1+ + z=− RT Vm Vm the first term is proportional to in the series expansion.15) This series can now be compared term by term to the virial series to give expression for the virial coefficients: ³ a ´ .16) B(T ) = b − RT 271 . D(T ) = b3 .

2.3. The Boyle Temperature The temperature at which B(T ) = 0 is called the Boyle temperature. 41. (41.17) = 1 + C(T ) Vm Vm ³ ´2 .2.41. (41.2. The gas behaves more like an ideal The lowest order correction are now V1 m gas at Tb then for other temperatures. One finds (see m homework) B(T ) B 0 (T ) = . The virial series at Tb becomes µ ¶2 µ ¶ µ ¶3 1 1 1 z(T = Tb ) = 1 + 0 + C(T ) + D(T ) + ··· Vm Vm Vm µ ¶3 µ ¶2 1 1 + D(T ) + ··· .19) RT 272 . The Virial Series in Pressure One can also expand the compressibility factor in pressure z = 1 + B 0 (T )P + C 0 (T )P 2 + D0 (T )P 3 + · · · . (41.18) The relation of this expansion to the one in V1 can be obtained. Tb .

C(T ) = RT T B0 bc D(T ) = . a.21) 41. Estimation of Virial Coefficients The virial coefficients can be estimated using empirical equations and tabulated parameters. • Estimates based on Beattie-Bridgeman constants: c A0 − 3. T3 B(T ) = B0 − where A0 . (41.23) (41. b.2.24) 273 . RT T A0 a B0 c − B0 b − 3 .25) 128Pc T (41.20) D(T ) − 3B(T )C(T ) − 2B(T )3 (RT )3 (41.22) (41.4.C 0 (T ) = and D0 (T ) = C(T ) − B(T )2 (RT )2 (41. for now treat them as empirical parameters): µ ¶ 9RTc 6Tc2 B(T ) = 1− 2 . c are tabulated constants • Estimates based on critical values (we will discuss critical values shortly. B0 .

V and T behavior of dense fluids (e. • κT is different from z. V and T behavior We shall briefly consider the P. Taking volume as a function of P and T. Behavior of Gases 42.. • At a given pressure.g. • Positive κT means the volume of the fluid decreases with increasing pressure. 274 274 . κT describes the change in volume with pressure. the compressibility factor. V V ∂T P V ∂P T | {z } | {z } α −κT α is the coefficient of thermal expansion.42. • Positive α means the volume of the fluid increases with increasing temperature.1. we consider the total derivative ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂V ∂V dT + dP.1) dV (T. P ) = ∂T P ∂P T We can change this from a extensive property equation to an intensive property equation by dividing by V : µ ¶ µ ¶ 1 ∂V 1 ∂V dV = dT + dP. P. liquids). κT is the isothermal compressibility • At a given temperature. (42. α describes the change in volume with temperature.

1.1.42. α and κT for an ideal gas As an exercise we shall calculate α and κT using the ideal gas equation of state (n.b. α and κT for liquids and solids à ¡ ¢! ∂ nRT 1 1 P = /R = n/ ∂T VP T |{z} P =n R / /T (42.3) In general. P0 .. (42. V (P ) ≈ V0 [1 − κT (P − P0 )] . So one can expand the volume in a Taylor series about a known pressure.2) = = V ∂P T V ∂P V P T = and n/T 1 /R/ 1 1 nRT = = (P V ) P P /R/ P n/T | {z } =nRT 1 α= V µ ∂V ∂T ¶ P 1 = V 42. At constant T ¶ ¶2 µ ∂V ∂V (P − P0 ) + (P − P0 )2 + · · · V (P ) = V0 + ∂P ∂P T | {z T } µ −V0 κT (42.2. absurd to treat a liquid as an ideal gas). 275 . P à ¡ ¢! µ ¶ µ ¶ nRT −1 ∂V −1 ∂ nRT −1 P − 2 κT = (42.5) This approximation is quite good even over a rather large pressure range (P −P0 = 100 atm or so). of course. it is. the compressibility and expansion of liquids (and solids) are very small. Starting with the ideal gas law: V = nRT .4) so.1.

2.2.8) κT − ∂P T rule ∂T V 42.H = U + PV CP = ∂T P so µ (42. (42.Likewise at constant P ¶ ¶2 µ ∂V ∂V (T − T0 ) + (T − T0 )2 + · · · V (T ) = V0 + ∂T P ∂T T | {z } µ V0 α (42. The Relationship Between CP and CV To find how CP and CV are related we begin with ¶ µ ∂H . V (T ) ≈ V0 [1 + α(T − T0 )] . 42. we can apply the cyclic rule for partial derivatives to determine the ratio κα : T ¡ ∂V ¢ ¶ µ α ∂P ∂T P cyclic = ¡ ∂V ¢ = (42.7) As one final point.9) ¶ ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂ (U + P V ) ∂U ∂V = +P (42.11) P 276 .1. Use an identity of partial derivatives ∂T ∂T µ ∂U ∂T ¶ = P µ ∂U ∂T ¶ + V µ ∂U ∂V ¶ µ T ∂V ∂T ¶ (42.10) CP = ∂T ∂T P ∂T P P ¡ ¢ ¡ ¢ note ∂U P is not CV we need ∂U V . Heat Capacity of Gases Revisited This section is a review from the first semester with an additional example beyond the ideal gas.6) so.

16) κT For gases we need the equation of state which often is conveniently explicit in P or V but not both CP = CV + 1.13) ∂P ∂T ¶ (42.17) T V ∂T with − ¡ ∂V ¢P ∂P T ¡ ∂V ¢ (42.15) P V α2 T V (42.18) 277 . Explicit in V : Replace µ ∂P ∂T ¶ ∂V ∂T ¶ with − ¡ ∂T ¢V ∂P ∂V P ¡ ∂P ¢ (42. µ ∂P ∂T ¶ = α κT (42.12) CP = ∂V T ∂T P ∂T P V ¶ ∙µ ¶ µ ¸ ∂U ∂V = CV + +P .thus ¶ µ ¶ ¶ µ ∂V ∂U ∂V + +P (42. Explicit in P : Replace µ 2. Then ∂T µ ∂U ∂T µ CP = CV + Finally CP = CV + T µ ∂V ∂T ¶ ∙ µ ¶ ¸ ∂P T −P +P / / ∂T V P µ ∂V ∂T ¶ µ P ¶ (42.14) V For solids and liquids: µ so ∂V ∂T ¶ = V α. ∂T P ∂V T ¡ ¢ ¡ ∂U ¢ Recall the expression for internal pressure ∂V T = T ∂P V − P .

= ∂T P P ∂T − ¡ ∂V ¢P = − ∂P T µ ∂V ∂P ¶ T =− nRT . One term viral equation (equation of state: V = nRT + nB). Ideal gas (equation of state: P V = nRT ): This equation is easily made explicit in either P or V so we don’t need any of the above replacements ¶ µ ¶ µ ∂P ∂V (42. This is explicit P in V so use case 2 above ¶ µ ¶ ¶ ¡ ∂V ¢ µ µ ∂P ∂V ∂V ∂T ¡ ∂V ¢P CP = CV + T = CV − T (42.22) Thus CP ! ¶Ã nR P (R + P B 0 ) + nB 0 = CV + / T P RT / ¶2 µ P B0 = CV + nR 1 + R µ CP m ¶2 µ P B0 = CV m + R 1 + R (42.21) so ¡ ∂V ¢ nR P + nB 0 / P (R + P B 0 ) n = .19) CP = CV + T ∂T P ∂T V nRT nR nR = = nR = CV + T P V PV Thus CP = CV + nR or CP m = CV m + R 2.23) or (42.Examples 1.24) 278 . nRT − P2 / RT n (42. P2 (42.20) ∂T P ∂T V ∂T P ∂P T The partial derivatives are ¶ µ ∂V nR + nB 0 .

there is always an intermediate equilibrium throughout the expansion. Namely Pgas = Pex . Isothermal expansion T is constant 2.42. Expansion of Gases Expanding gases do work: −w = Z V2 Pex dV (42. V ) = U(T ) (independent of V ).27) Also recall that −wrev is the maximum possible work that can be done in an expansion.25) V1 As we learned last semester the value of w depends on Pex during the expansion. Adiabatic expansion q = 0. 279 .3.26) V1 this becomes Z V2 −wrev = V1 µ ¶ V2 nRT dV = nRT ln V V1 (42. Isothermal and Adiabatic expansions We shall consider two limits for the expansion of gases 1. 42. Isothermal expansion • For the case of a ideal gas.1. U (T. −wrev = −wmax .3. Recall that if the expansion is reversible. −wrev = For an ideal gas (P = nRT ) V Z V2 Pgas dV (42. So for isothermal expansion 4U = 0 = q + w =⇒ q = −w. So.

dU = dw = −Pex dV = −P dV (reversible).33) 280 .29) (42. • For an ideal gas dU = −P dV = −nRT dV V (42. Or.3.Adiabatic expansion • Since q = 0. V1 ) to (T2 .28) 42. V1 ) to (T2 .30) T1 CV dT = T Z V2 V1 −nR dV. V2 ).32) CV ln T1 V1 ¯ where CV = 1 (CV (T1 ) + CV (T2 )) . Heat capacity CV for adiabatic expansions Considering an ideal gas going adiabatically from (T1 . Recall ¶ µ ∂U CV = =⇒ dU = CV dT ∂T V So from above CV dT −nRdV −nRT dV =⇒ = V T V Going from (T1 .31) If CV (T ) is reasonably constant over the internal T1 to T2 then this is approximately µ ¶ µ ¶ V2 T2 ¯ = −nR ln (42. V2 ): CV dT = Z T2 (42. in terms of molar heat capacity 2 T2 ¯ CV m ln T1 µ ¶ V2 = −R ln V1 µ ¶ (42. V (42.2.

P (42. Now.3.40) 281 .35) P For an ideal gas this becomes Cp dT = Going from (T1 .34) =⇒ dH = Cp dT = V dP (42. P2 ): Z T2 T1 nRT dP P Z (42. change) / / dH = dq + dw + P dV + V dP dH = V dP.39) From the above two cases µ ¶ µ ¶ µ ¶ R −R P2 V2 T2 = ¯ ln = ¯ ln ln T1 P1 V1 CP m CV m (42. in general. in terms of molar heat capacity 2 T2 ¯ CP m ln T1 µ ¶ P2 = R ln P1 µ ¶ (42.36) CP dT = T P2 P1 nR dP. CP = µ ∂H ∂T ¶ (42.38) CP ln T1 P1 ¯ where CP = 1 (CP (T1 ) + CP (T2 )) . Or. dH = dU + P dV + V dP (because both P and V can.37) If CP (T ) is reasonably constant over the internal T1 to T2 then this is approximately µ ¶ µ ¶ P2 T2 ¯ = nR ln (42. P1 ) to (T2 .42. When P is the more convenient variable What if P is the more convenient variable? Then use H instead of U Let us still consider an adiabatic expansion H = U + P V.3.

4. 282 .3.43) 42.So P2 ln P1 µ ¶ µ µ ¶ hence P2 ln P1 V2 = −γ ln V1 P2 P1 ¶ = µ V1 V2 Thus µ µ ¶ ¯ V2 CP m = − ¯ ln V1 CV | {zm } ≡γ (42. Joule expansion Consider a gas expanding adiabatically against a vacuum (Pex = 0). (42. In this case q = 0 (adiabatic) and w = 0 (since −dw = Pex dV ).42) but Pi Viγ are arbitrary so this implies P V γ = constant (** NOTE: The axes should be reversed **) ¶γ ⇒ P2 V2γ = P1 V1γ .41) ¶ V1 = γ ln V2 µ ¶ V1 = ln V2 µ ¶γ (42.

That is. for Joule type expansion the temperature of the gas does not change. Internal energy is constant.This implies 4U = q + w = 0.45) U For an ideal gas ∂V T = 0 (since U(T.3. For real gases this is not strictly equal to zero. Joule-Thomson expansion Consider the adiabatic expansion as illustrated by the figure below ¡ ∂U ¢ 283 . ¶ µ ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂U ∂U ∂T 1 =− = ∂U V ∂V T CV ∂V T | {z } 1/CV µ ∂T ∂V ¶ (42. 42. V ) = U(T )). We want to find Identity: ¡ ∂T ¢ ∂V (42.44) U .5. Thus in as much as the ¡ ∂T ¢ gas can be considered ideal ∂V U = 0.

46) (42. ¶ µ ¶ ¶ µ µ ∂H ∂T 1 ∂H =− = =μ ∂H P ∂P T CP ∂P T | {z } 1/CP ∂T ∂P ¶ (42.The work done on the left is wL = −P1 4V = −P1 (0 − V1 ) = P1 V1 .50) H 284 .49) H ≡ μ.48) (42. The work done on the right is wR = −P2 4V = −P2 (V2 − 0) = −P2 V2 . We want to find Identity: µ ¡ ∂T ¢ ∂V (42. Now. (the Joule-Thomson coefficient).47) (42. 4U = U2 − U1 = wL + wR = P1 V1 − P2 V2 Thus U2 + P2 V2 = U1 + P1 V1 ⇒ H2 = H1 For Joule-Thomson expansion the enthalpy is constant.

52) Example: The one term virial equation: (equation of state P V = nRT + nB) µ ¶ nRT 1 −nRT 0 − nB + + nT B μ = CP P P −B + T B 0 . (42. so μ is negative–the gas warms upon expansion • The Joule-Thomson inversion temperature is the temperature where μ = 0. μ = CP m Limts: • Low T : B 0 is positive and B is negative.51) T P ¡ ¢ −V + T ∂V P ∂T μ= CP (42. so μ is positive–the gas cools upon expansion • High T : B 0 is nearly zero and B is positive.53) 285 .Recall the useful identity µ Thus ∂H ∂P ¶ =V −T µ ∂V ∂T ¶ (42.

1. • At constant V : — dU = dq + dw dq=CV dT =⇒ dU = CV dT. So dH = dq =⇒ dq=T dS dH = CP dT. So Z T2 CP CP dT =⇒ 4S = dT. (43. So Z T2 CV CV dT =⇒ 4S = dT. Entropy of Gases 43.1) At constant P : (use H = U + P V instead of U) P — dH = dU +P dV +V dP = dq−P dV +P dV +V dP . Calculation of Entropy Entropy must be calculated along reversible paths. Entropy change for changes in temperature. dS = T T T1 (43. but also dH = T dS. 286 286 . but also dU = T dS.2) dS = T T T1 dq=C dT Isothermal expansion of an ideal gas (P V = nRT ): • Recall that for isothermal expansion of an ideal gas dU = 0 = T dS − P dV dV ⇒ dS = P T .43. This is not a problem though since entropy is a state function.

V V1 (43.• Using the equation of state nRdV =⇒ 4S = dS = V Z V2 V1 V2 nR dV = nR ln .3) • Using the equation of state to express V1 and V2 in terms of P1 and P2 . Entropy of Mixing of an ideal gas • Since the gas is ideal.6) VA + VB .4) If two variables change in going from the initial to final states break the path into two paths in which only one variable changes at a time. there are simply two separate equations: 4SA = nA R ln and 4Smix = 4SA + 4SB (43. V1 P1 /R / n / T P1 /R / n / T (43.5) 287 . VA 4SB = nB R ln VB + VA VB (43. V2 P2 dS = nR ln = nR ln P2 = −nR ln .

⎛ ⎞ 1/XA 1/XB ⎜ nA + nB nB + nA ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ + nB ln 4Smix = R ⎜nA ln ⎟ = −R (nA ln XA + nB ln XB ) nA nB ⎠ ⎝ | {z } | {z } (43.• Recall Avogadro’s principle: n ∝ V for an ideal gas. so ideal ideal S2 − S1 = −nR ln (43.12) ideal Defining S2 . this becomes S2 − / 1 S ideal ideal = S2 − / 1 S ideal − nB 0 (P2 − P1 ) (43.9) For an ideal gas B 0 = 0. Entropy of Real Gases Consider the question: How does S → S ideal as P → 0 ? Use Maxwell relation nRT + nB.7) 43.8) µ ¶ → nR P2 → 0 − nB dP =⇒ S2 − S1 = −nR ln dS = − − nB 0 (P2 − P1 ) P P1 P2 P1 (43. V = Hence ¶ T ∂V =− ∂T µ ¶ P =− nR − nB 0 P (43.11) Letting P1 → 0 and P2 → P θ (Standard pressure 1 bar). P2 → P θ as S θ .10) Thus ideal ideal S2 − S1 = S2 − S1 − nB 0 (P2 − P1 ) (43. So.1.1. So. P So ¡ ∂S ¢ µ ∂S ∂P ∂P T = − ¡ ∂V ¢ ∂T P and single term viral equation. S(P θ ) = S θ − nB 0 P θ (43.13) 288 .

The entropy at any P and T can be obtained expresses as S(T. P ) = S θ (T ) − nR ln P − nB 0 P Pθ (43.15) 289 . P ) − nB 0 P Thus S(T. P ) = S ideal (T.14) (43.

−mv2 (43.Key Equations for Exam 3 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 3.16) • The average speed of a particle is hvi = • The mean free path is r 8RT πM (43. The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations.18) 290 290 . The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets. This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material.17) RT λ= √ 2P Lπσ 2 (43. Equations • The Maxwell’s distribution of speeds is F (v) = 4π µ m 2πkb T ¶3 2 e 2kb T v2 .

25) • The virial series is µ ¶ µ ¶2 µ ¶3 1 1 1 z = 1 + B(T ) + C(T ) + D(T ) + ··· .• The reaction velocity is v= 1 d[I] vi dt (43.19) • The relation between the rate constant and the thermodynamic equilibrium constant is kf Kc = (43.23) (43.21) • Important thermodynamic relation: 4G = 4H − T 4S • Eyring’s equation is k= kb T − 4H ‡ 4S‡ kb T − 4G‡ e RT = e RT e R h h (43.27) 291 .20) kr • The Arrhenious equation k = Ae− RT Ea (43.26) (43. nRT RT (43. Vm Vm Vm • Relation between heat capacities for an ideal gas: CP m = CV m + R (43.24) z= (43.22) • The van der Waals gas equation of state: P = • Compressibility Factor: a RT − 2. Vm − b Vm P Vm PV = .

Part VIII More Thermodyanmics 292 292 .

44.1. Critical Behavior of fluids The point on the top of the coexistence curve is called the critical point. and a critical density ρc . Tc . Law of rectilinear diameters: The average density [ρave = 1 (ρliq + ρvap )] is 2 linear in temperature. It is characterized by a critical temperature. 293 293 . Critical Phenomena 44.

294 .44. Simple gas laws do not work well near critical points. Gas Laws in the Critical Region The vapor pressure of a substance is taken from the gas laws as the pressures where A1 = A2 in the above figure.1.1.

33 295 . Tc .375 3/8 = 0. That is (for the van der Waals Equation) zc = 0.5) (44. Vmc ) Pc = a RTc − 2 . at the critical point zc = Pc Vmc 3 = = 0. Tc and Vmc gives Vmc = 3b. Vmc − b Vmc 2 (44.44. The other equations of state give similar results van der Waals Berthelot Dieterici Redlich-Kwong zc 3/8 = 0.7) Notice that both a and b whose values depend on the particular gas have dropped out. setting 2 m the first and second derivatives at the critical point equal to zero we get ¯ dP ¯ ¯ = −RTc + 2a = 0 (44. Pc = 27b2 ¯ d2 P ¯ ¯ = 2RTc − 6a = 0 2¯ 4 dVm c (Vmc − b)3 Vmc (44. Gas Constants from Critical Data Consider the van der Waals equation at the critical point (Pc .3) (44. RTc 8 (44. Tc = 27bR a .4) (44.2) 3 dVm ¯c (Vmc − b)2 Vmc and solving these three equations for Pc . 8a . z.375.27 0.1.6) These values can be used to find the compressibility factor.2.375 for all gases. So. dVP = 0) at the critical point.1) dP d There is an inflection point ( dVm = 0.375 2/e2 ' 0.

18 Laidler&Meiser ∗ ∗ 44.2. 1. This is actually not too far from the truth experimentally. 296 . the pressure of the system when μβ = μα is the called the vapor pressure of the material at temperature T. dn. ∗ ∗ See Fig. then for a given T . goes from α → β • (dAα )T = −P dVα − μα dn • (dAβ )T = −P dVβ + μβ dn = 0 since V is constant • (dA)T. The Law of Corresponding States We have found that zc is predicted by the equations of state to be independent of the particular gas.V = −P For a spontaneous process A deceases (dA < 0) z }| { (dVα + dVβ ) ¡ ¢ + μβ − μα dn At equilibrium dA = 0. One can define unitless “reduced” variables Tr = T /Tc . This implies μβ = μα is the condition for equilibrium.3. Pr = P/Pc . When α. and Vr = V /Vc . Then zr = Pr Vrr . RT zr is a “universal” function–it is nearly the same for all gasses.44. Phase Equilibrium Consider a homogeneous substance consisting of two phases α and β at a constant T and V. Suppose some amount of material. β denote liquid (or solid) and vapor phases.

44. µ ∂μ ∂P ¶ (44. µ ∂S ∂n ¶ µ ¶ (44.¡ ¢ For phase changes at constant T and P then (dG)T.n P.3.8) (44. (44. P ) = −Sm dT + Vm dP −S V (44. dG = −SdT + V dP + μdn Now. P ) = ∂T P ∂P T dμ(T.13) 297 . P ) so. The chemical potential and T and P How does μ vary with T and P ? Generally for homogeneous substances. ∂n ∂T ∂T ∂n ∂T P µ ∂μ ∂T ¶ = −Sm .12) T Now the total differential of μ is m z z m µ }|¶ { µ }| ¶ { ∂μ ∂μ dT + dP dμ(T. (44.P = μβ − μα dn. So again μβ = μα is the condition for equilibrium.1.10) But S = nSm (T. ∂G S=− ∂T So. = Vm .T µ ¶ ∂ ∂G ∂μ ∂ ∂G =− =− =− .9) P.11) P Similarly.

20) = d(ln P ) and dT T2 = −d(1/T ) so this becomes 4v Hm d(1/T ) R (44.21) d(ln P ) = − 298 .16) 44.3. consider the liquidvapor phase transition.17) Substituting this into the Clapeyron equation gives 4v Hm 4v Hm P dP = = RT dT RT 2 T P 4v Hm dT dP = P R T2 Now we identify dP P (44.3.liq ' Vm. −Smα dT + Vmα dP = −Smβ dT + Vmβ dP Now Smα − Smβ −4φ Sm dP = = dT Vmα − Vmβ −4φ Vm 4φ Hm dP = dT T 4φ Vm 4S= 4H T (44.2. Now 4v V = Vm.3.19) Collecting the T ’s on one side of the equation and the P ’s on the other we get (44.15) (44.vap Assuming the vapor phase obeys the ideal gas equation of state. Vapor Equilibrium and the Clausius-Clapeyron Equation The above Clapeyron equation applies to any phase transition. 4v V = RT P (44.14) = This is the Clapeyron Equation 4φ Hm T 4φ Vm (44.vap − Vm.44.18) (44. The Clapeyron Equation At equilibrium μβ = μα so.

(44. “A diamond is not forever!” At equilibrium μα = μβ this implies (for incompressible liquids and solids) μª + Vmα (P − P ª ) = μª + Vmβ (P − P ª ) α β (44.24) α β 299 .23) This can be rearranged so that terms independent of pressure (the standard chemical potentials) are one side and the terms that depend of pressure are on the other side μª − μª = (Vmβ − Vmα ) (P − P ª ) (44.Rearranging again leads to 4v Hm d(ln P ) =− d(1/T ) R This is the Clausius-Clapeyron equation.22) 44.4. most other common liquids • Solid—solid — rhombic sulfur—monoclinic sulfur — grey tin—white tin — graphite—diamond For example a diamond at STP is metastable with respect to graphite. Equilibria of condensed phases Examples • Solid—liquid — ice—water.

27) 300 . 44.26) 4f Hm 4f Hm Tf → T ª where Tf is the freezing temperature at standard pressure (1 bar).Thus for any given T only one P allows for equilibrium. • Triple Point: The point where all three phases coexist in equilibrium: μsolid = μliq = μvap (44. Triple Point and Phase Diagrams Definitions • Phase Diagram: A graph of P vs.25) We make the good approximation that 4f Hm is independent of T and solve the Clapeyron equation Z → 4f Vm dP Tf 4f Vm (P − P ª ) dT = ⇒ ln ª = (44. Recall the Clapeyron equation 4f Hm Hmβ − Hmα dP = = dT T 4f Vm T (Vmβ − Vmα ) (44.5. T for a system which shows the lines of equal chemical potential • Critical Point: The terminal point of the liquid-vapor line. At temperatures above the critical point there is no distinction between vapor and liquid.

Thermal Conductivity: The flux of energy down a temperature gradient ∗ ∗ See Transport Phenomena handout ∗ ∗ 45. Diffusion At equilibrium concentration on a bulk solution will be uniform. So if there exists a concentration gradient there will be a net flux. of material from high concentration to low concentration so as to establish an equilibrium.1) 301 301 .1. Viscosity: The flux of momentum down a velocity gradient 3.45. Flux: movement of something through a unit area. J= 1 dn A dt (45. We now consider three transport properties of fluids: 1. Diffusion: The flux of material down a concentration gradient 2. J. Transport Properties of Fluids Transport properties of matter deal with the flow (or flux) of some property along a gradient of some other property.

∂t ∂x ∂x If D is truly constant we get Fick’s second law of diffusion: ∂ 2C ∂C =D 2. The change in concentration in a lamina between x and dx with time is given by the flux in minus the flux out of the lamina: J(x) − J(x + dx) ∂J ∂C = =− ∂t dx ∂x Using Fick’s first law for J ∂ ∂C ∂C = D . ∂t ∂x (45.3) (45.The flux of material through a plane depends on the concentration difference J = −D dC 1 dn dC =⇒ = −D dx A dt dx where D is the diffusion constant dC 1 dn = −D A dt dx This is Fick’s first law of diffusion (in one dimension).4) (45.2) (45.5) 302 .

i. t) = C0 2 π 0 ¶¸ ∙ µ x 1 C0 1 − erf √ = 2 4Dt ¶ µ 1 x = C0 erfc √ 2 4Dt " (45. Viscosity Viscosity. The solution for two special boundary conditions are of interest and will simply be presented here without derivation 1. 303 . η.6) 2. Numerous methods of solution exist for this equation but they are beyond the scope of the course. The tendency of a liquid to flow at the same velocity throughout.2. Point source solution x2 C0 C(x.e. Step function solution # Z √x 4Dt 1 1 2 −√ e−y dy C(x. t) = √ e− 4Dt 2 πDt (45. is the resistance to differential fluid flow.7) where erf and erfc are tabulated functions respectively called the error function and complementary error function. 45.The solution of this partial differential equation depends on the boundary conditions..

dv The frictional (viscous) force is F = ηA dx .. the difference in pressure on either side of the tube.9) Stoke’s law: spheres falling through fluids 304 .8) 4t 8ηl where 4P is the driving pressure. length l). (The units of η are g = cm·s . the volume of flow 4V in time 4t is πr4 4P 4V =− (45.) mass . i.e. • For a gas 4V πr2 = 4t 16ηl µ 2 Pi2 − Pf P0 where Pi is the inlet pressure. ¶ (45. Pf is the outlet pressure and P0 is the pressure at which the volume is read. lenght·time 1 poise Poiseuille’s Formula • Applies to Laminar (nonturbulent) flow • For a liquid flowing trough a tube (radius r.

The plates are held at constant but different temperatures T1 and T2 (T1 > T2 ) for a sufficiently long time that a steady state exists.• The frictional force (exerted upwards) is proportional to velocity: Ff = −fv. Stewart and E. Stokes showed f = 6πηr • Gravitational force (exerted downwards): Fg = gravitational acceleration (9. of a material is a measure of the tendency of energy in the form of heat to flow through the material. 3 where g is the • Terminal velocity is reached when Ff + Fg = 0 giving −f vterm + vterm = using f = 6πηr vterm 4π r/ (ρ − ρ0 )g / 3 2r2 (ρ − ρ0 )g ¡ ¢ = = 9η 3 6π ηr / / D= kT f f =6πηr 4πr3 (ρ − ρ0 )g = 0 3 4πr3 (ρ − ρ0 )g 3f (45.8 m/s2 ). 305 . Bird.B. Lightfoot Wiley New York 1960) The thermal conductivity. 4πr3 (ρ − ρ0 )g.3. κ.11) • Related to diffusion constant: = kT 6πηr (45.E.12) 45. N. Consider a slab of solid material of area A between two large parallel plates a distance D apart. Thermal conductivity (This section closely follows parts of chapter 8 in Transport Phenomena by R. W.10) (45.

i. And a constant rate of heat flow dq is needed to maintain dt the temperature difference 4T = (T1 − T2 ) 4T 1 dq = −κ . a linear steady state temperature distribution across the material is established..Under such conditions. Thermal Conductivity of Gases and Liquids ∗ ∗ See Reduced thermal conductivity handout ∗ ∗ From this handout we see that typically the thermal conductivity of gases at low densities increases with increasing temperature.1.13) A dt D If we take the limit where D becomes infinitesimally small (D → dx) we obtain a differential form of this equation: 1 dq dT = Qf = −κ . 306 . (45. Thermal conductivities are positive quantities so Fourier’s law says that heat flow down a temperature gradient.3.14) A dt dx where Qf is the heat flux. This is called Fourier’s law of heat conduction (one-dimensional version). from hot to cold. whereas the thermal conductivity of most liquids decrease with increasing temperature. 45. (45.e.

the thermal conductivity of solids have to be determined experimentally because many factors contributing to the thermal conductivity are difficult to predict. κel T where L is the Lorenz number (typically 22 to 29 × 10−9 V2 /K2 ). κel for pure metals: κ = L = const. (45. There is no analog to superconductivity for thermal conductivity.2. In general metals are better heat conductors than nonmetals and crystals are better heat conductors than amorphous materials. Frantz and Lorenz equation relates the thermal conductivity to electrical conductivity.3.15) 307 . The Wiedemann. The Lorenz number is taken as constant because it is only a very weak function of temperature with a change of 10 to 20% per 1000 degrees being typical. Frantz and Lorenz equation breaks down at low temperature because metals become superconductive. The Wiedemann.45. Dry porous materials are poor heat conductors Rule of Thumb: Thermal conductivity and electrical conductivity go hand in hand. Thermal Conductivity of Solids For the most part.

M1 X1 where M1 is the molecular weight of species 1 n2 L solution 46.46. say. Solutions Solutions are mixtures of two or more pure substances. in general change upon mixing X 4mix = properties of soln − properties of pure. in addition to the parameters needed to characterize a pure substance.2. 308 308 (46. Partial Molar Quantities Thermodynamic properties. n1 +n2 • mole fraction X2 = • molality m = • Molarity c2 = X1 = 1 − X2 1000X2 . Measures of Composition There are several measures of composition of solutions • mole ratio r = n1 n2 n2 .1) (46. one also needs to keep track of the amount of individual species in solution 46. volume.1.2) . So. 4mix V = Vsoln − Vsolute − Vsolvent Consider a thermodynamic quantity. For example.

nj So now for the more general case of mixtures the chemical potential of a species of the partial molar free energy for that species. it is a function of T. n1 and n2 : V (T.n1 .P.n2 ∂n2 T.n1 . rather than simply the molar free energy as it was earlier. Notation The study of solutions brings with it here for future reference.n2 ∂n2 T.n2 ∂P T. ∂T P. 46.n1 (46.3) ³ ´ ∂V ¯ ≡ Vi .nj Similarly ¶ ¶ ¶ ¶ µ µ µ µ ∂G ∂G ∂G ∂G dT + dP + dn1 + dn2 .n1 .2.n1 (46. n1 . n2 ). P.P.P. P. the total derivative is ¶ ¶ µ ¶ ¶ µ µ µ ∂V ∂V ∂V ∂V dV = dT + dP + dn1 + dn2 .n2 ∂n1 T.4) ³ ´ ∂G ≡ μi . the partial molar volume.1.n2 ∂P T.In general.P. dG = ∂T P. ∂ni T.n2 ∂n1 T. ∂ni T. So.P.n1 . Material Pure liquid i Vi• • Pure liquid i per mole Vmi Whole solution V Solution/(total moles) Vm ¯ Partial molar of i in solution Vi Apparent molar (of solute) φ V Reference state Viª a large number of symbols which we collect Hi• • Hmi H Hm ¯ Hi φ H Hiª Si• • Smi S Sm ¯ Si Siª G• i • μi G Gm μi μª i 309 .P.

4mix V > 0. (46. For example. is not necessarily the mole weighted sum of the volumes of each component in its pure (unmixed) state.2.46. 1.5) ¯ Now. one unit of baseballs are mixed with one unit of basketballs. 2. The total volume. dn1 = n1 dλ.8) 4mix V can be positive. negative or zero.2. the total volume of the solution is equal to the sum of the partial molar volumes each weighted by their respective number of moles. Vi depends on concentration. dn2 = n2 dλ. So. Partial Molar Volumes Consider the partial molar volume For constant T and P ¯ ¯ dV = V1 dn1 + V2 dn2 (46. More specifically 4mix V • • = V − (Vm1 n1 + Vm2 n2 ) ¡ ¢ • • ¯ ¯ = V1 n1 + V2 n2 − (Vm1 n1 + Vm2 n2 ) ¡ ¡ ¢ ¢ • • ¯ ¯ = V1 − Vm1 n1 + V2 − Vm2 n2 ¢ ¡ dλ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ dV = V1 n1 + V2 n2 dλ =⇒ V = V1 n1 + V2 n2 (46. so change each amount of substance proportional to the amount substance present. 4mix V < 0. one unit of baseballs are mixed with one unit of books.7) (46. however.6) That is. 310 .

the ideal state for Henry’s law Raoult’s law limit 46. the ideal state for Raoult’s law 2.1. neat (pure) solvent limit 1. infinite dilution limit 1.3. all neighboring molecules are different than the given molecule 2.3. Reference states for liquids For liquids there are two more convenient ideal states 1. Activity (a brief review) Henry’s law limit Recall that activity gives a measure of the deviation of the real state from some reference state 311 .46. all neighboring molecules are same as the given molecule 2.

γi ≡ which we can rearrange as ai = γ i g(ζ). (46. μi − μª = RT ln ai . and ζ ª is the value of ζ at the reference state.11) The definition of activity implies that γ i = 1 at g(ζ ª ) (the reference state) That is γ i → 1 as the real system approaches the reference state. concentration etc.g.9) ζ→ζ ª g(ζ) where g(ζ) is any reference function (e.). mole fraction. This implicit definition is awkward so for convenience one defines the activity coefficient as the argument of the above limit. Raoult’s Law In discussing both Raoult’s law and Henry’s law.12) i ai g(ζ) (46. (46.Also recall that the mathematical definition of activity ai of some species i is implicitly stated as ai lim =1 (46.10) 46.. we are describing the behavior of a liquid solution by measuring the vapor (partial) pressures of the components 312 .3.2. pressure. Connecting with the chemical potential we saw last semester that the deviation of the chemical potential at the state of interest versus at the reference state is determined by the activity at the current state (the activity at the reference state is unity by definition).

For simplicity we consider here only a two component solution. Take differential change along a line of constant concentration.15) (46.16) (46.14) (46. dG = μ1 dn1 + μ2 dn2 . • ai Pi (46. 4mix G = μ1 n1 + μ2 n2 − μ• n1 − μ• n2 1 2 (46. 1 2 ai low P Pi ' RT ln • .18) Now.13) = (μ1 − μ• ) n1 + (μ2 − μ• ) n2 . Recall that 4mix G = G(soln) − G(pure components) Hence. μ1 − μ• = RT ln 1 where Pi is the vapor pressure of the ith component above the solution.17) (46. so dG = (μ1 n1 + μ2 n2 ) dλ then G = μ1 n1 + μ2 n2 . 313 .

24) (46.21) That is.22) • • P1 / P2 / 4mix G = RT (n1 ln X1 + n2 ln X2 ) Again. The change in free energy upon mixing for solutions ideally obeying Raoult’s law is à ! • • X1 P/ X2 P/ id(RL) 1 2 4mix G = RT n1 ln + n2 ln (46.3.20) 46. ∂T P ∂ (1/T ) P the entropy of mixing for an ideal Raoult solution is µ 4mix S = −R (n1 ln X1 + n2 ln X2 ) and the enthalpy of mixing is 4mix H = 0 id(RL) id(RL) id(RL) (46.19) (46.Thus or at low P ¶ µ P1 P2 4mix G = RT n1 ln • + n2 ln • P1 P2 ¶ µ a1 a2 4mix G = RT n1 ln • + n2 ln • a1 a2 (46.23) (46. From ¶ ¶ µ ∂G ∂ (G/T ) S=− and H = − . the vapor partial pressure of a component of a mixture is equal to the mole fraction of the component times the vapor pressure that the component would have if it were pure. this is for an ideal solution in the Raoult’s Law sense.26) 314 .3.25) (46. Ideal Solutions (RL) Raoult’s Law: Pi = Xi Pi• (46.

real solutions generally deviate from Raoult’s law. in reality. • negative deviation: the molecules prefer to be around other types of molecules than themselves. The reference function is g(ζ) = ζ = Xi . The physical interpretation of deviation from Raoult’s law is • positive deviation: the molecules prefer to be around themselves rather than other types of molecules. Since. It does not require any kind of interaction among the constituent particle making up the solution. and the reference state is Xi = 1 So.(since G/T is independent of 1/T ). 315 . • no deviation: the molecules have no preference. (46.28) → 1 as Xi → 1 Deviations from Raoult’s Law Raoult’s law is a purely statistical law.27) = γi (RL) Xi . there are specific interactions between particles. The Reference State (RL) Let us apply the definition of activity for the Raoult’s law reference state. ai =1 Xi →1 Xi lim implies ai and γ i (RL) (RL) (RL) (46.

i. for a given component. For example. 316 . at infinite dilution.30) (46.e.4. Positive deviation from Raoult’s lawNegative deviation from Raoult’s law 46. kXi = lim µ Pi Xi ¶ (46. mixing with one substance may lead to a positive deviation but mixing with another substance may lead to a negative deviation.It is very important to note that this deviation from Raoult’s law is a property of the solution and NOT any given component.3.. where kXi is the Henry’s law constant.29) Xi →0 Henry’s law applies to the solute not to the solvent and becomes more correct for real solution as the concentration of solute goes to zero (Xi → 0). Henry’s Law Henry’s Law: Pi = kXi Xi .

(46. (HL) ai lim =1 (46. whereas Henry’s law applies to the subdominant species X2 → 0.31) Xi →0 Xi implies (HL) (HL) = γ i Xi . Raoult’s law applies to the dominant species.32) ai → 1 as Xi → 0 and γ i If instead of mole fraction. they apply to opposite species in the solution. So. X1 → 1. But. and the reference state is now Xi = 0 So.33) = γ Mi Mi (HL) (46.34) 317 . in summary • Raoult’s law: γ 1 → 1 as X1 → 1 • Henry’s law: γ 2 → 1 as X2 → 0 (HL) (HL) (HL) = γ (HL) mi mi (46. Comparison of Raoult’s Law and Henry’s Law Both Raoult’s law and Henry’s law become better approximations for real solutions as the solution becomes pure.The Reference State (HL) Referring to the definition of activity again we see that the reference function is g(ζ) = ζ = Xi . molality or molarity is used then ai and ai respectively.

4. Colligative Properties Colligative properties: Properties of dilute solutions that are independent of the chemical nature of the solute Examples • Freezing point depression • Boiling point elevation • Vapor pressure lowering • Osmotic pressure We will consider the examples of freezing point depression and osmotic pressure 46.4.46.1. | {z } μs 1 318 . μ1 (solid) = μ1 (soln). Freezing Point Depression At Tf (freezing point).

dG = V dP ).4. μ1 (soln) = μ• + RT ln a1 : 1 μs = μ• + RT ln a1 1 1 Rearranging this and taking the derivative with respect to T yields ¶ µ −1 ∂μs ∂μ• 1 ∂ ln a1 ∂ → 1 1 s • (μ − μ1 ) =⇒ = − ln a1 = ∂T → RT 1 ∂T RT 2 ∂T ∂T Now.38) •2 •2 • RTf Tf RTf • where Θ ≡ Tf − Tf . T.37) • For small changes in the freezing point we may approximate T by Tf in the integrand.36) = H and integrating we get µ ¶ Z → −1 4f H s • d ln a1 = (H1 − H1 ) dT = dT 2 RT RT 2 → Z Tf 4f H dT ln a1 = • RT 2 Tf (46.35) (46. using ∂μ ∂T (46. Z Tf −4f H 4f H ln a1 ' dT = Θ. The freezing point depression is Θ=− 46.Using the Raoult’s law reference state (since we are interested in the behavior of the dominant species).2. (46. (so. So. 319 . Osmotic Pressure RTf•2 ln a1 4f H We consider the osmotic pressure at a constant temperature.

40) (46.41) For dilute solutions X2 is small so ln(1 − X2 ) may be expanded as ln(1 − X2 ) = −X2 + but X2 = n2 n1 +n2 2 X3 X2 − 2 − · · · ' −X2 . 2 3 (46.In the above figure μ1 (left) = μ1 (right). ' m1 =⇒ n2 ' n1 RT RT V• (46. hence ¯ μ• = μ• + RT ln a1 + V1 Π.42) ' n2 n1 for dilute solutions. From the above equation ¯ V1 Π RT • ¯ Now we make the approximations V1 = Vm1 .39) ¯ where V1 is the partial molar volume of the solvent in solution (difficult to measure) and Π is the hydrostatic (osmotic) pressure. 1 1 (46.43) 320 . Thus 1 z }| { • • V Π n1 Vm1 Π n2 . a1 = X1 = 1 − X2 : ln a1 = ln(1 − X2 ) = • Vm1 Π RT (46.

or. Thus the solute in a very dilute solution behaves as if it were an ideal gas.44) Note the similarity of this equation with the ideal gas equation: P = cRT. 321 . Π= where c is the concentration of the solute. n2 RT = cRT. V1• |{z} 'c (46.

we will state their respective definitions here in a manner best suited for this chapter.1. The main concept of this approach is the idea of entropy production and.47. 47. These two areas of physical chemistry appear to be rather disjoint. Fundamentals We know the difference between reversible and irreversible processes from before. ultimately. entropy production per unit time–how fast we are producing entropy. 322 322 . Entropy Production and Irreverisble Thermodynamics We have seen that thermodynamics tells us if a process will occur and kinetics tells us how fast a process will occur. We now we consider thermodynamics of nonequilibrium states and investigate how (and how fast) these state move towards equilibrium. This allows us to make a stronger connection between thermodynamics and kinetics. However.

1) We will be concerned with the change in entropy. • di S is the change in entropy due to internal changes of the system The quantity di S is called the entropy production. Definitions • de S is the change in entropy due to interactions with the exterior environment. (47.g. the one dimensional wave equation. c ∂t2 ∂x c ∂(−t)2 ∂x c ∂t2 ∂x is invariant under time reversal Irreversible process: dynamical equations are not invariant under time inversion (t → −t).. the one dimensional heat equation.2) (47. which can be split into two components dS = de S + di S.g. 323 . 1 ∂ 2 u ∂ 2 u t→−t 1 ∂ 2 u ∂2u 1 ∂2u ∂2u = 2 =⇒ = 2 =⇒ = 2.. κ ∂t ∂x2 κ ∂(−t) ∂x2 κ ∂t ∂x2 is not invariant under time reversal. ∂ 2 T t→−t 1 ∂T ∂ 2T ∂2T 1 ∂T 1 ∂T = = = =⇒ =⇒ − . dS.Reversible process: dynamical equations are invariant under time inversion (t → −t). • e. • e.

Splitting up dS into these two parts permits an easy discussion of both open and isolated systems–the difference between the two appearing only in de S. the second law underlies all the concepts of this chapter.e. di S = dS ≥ 0. holds.2. The Second Law As you might expect. This is simply another in our long list of alternative statements of the second law. 324 . 47. General criteria for irreversibility: • di S = 0 (reversible change) • di S > 0 (irreversible change) For isolated systems have di S = dS and the principle of Clausius. in every macroscopic region of the system the entropy production due to irreversible processes is positive. compensated by a sufficient production in another part is prohibited — i. We need a “local” formulation of the second law: • Absorption of entropy in one part of the system..

325 . 47. phase changes. mixing. heat flow. (47.3) The local formulation statement implies di S I ≥ 0 and di S II ≥ 0 (47. di S I < 0 and di S II > 0 such that di S I + S II > 0 is excluded.I II Considering the above figure of an isolated system. chemical reactions. for example.4) ¡ ¢ and the possibility of. As example we now consider the last two of these: heat flow and chemical reactions.3. etc. Examples The idea of entropy production can be applied to any of the processes we have talked about. we write the principle of Clausius as dS = dS I + dS II ≥ 0.

Entropy Production due to Heat Flow Recall from the lecture on transport phenomena that the heat flux Qf is given by Qf = −κ 4T D q 4t (47.3. using Qf = κA4T q =− 4t D in differential form this is dT dq = −κA .7) dt dx Example: Find the entropy production in a system consisting of two identical connected blocks of metal (I and II).47. (47. one of which is held at temperature T1 and ¯ ¯ the other at T2 (take T1 > T > T2 ) where T is the temperature at the interface.6) We are now interested in exposing the time dependence.5) we get (47.1. so. 326 .

dt (47. To do so we must consider the entropy production per unit time di S . Using this we see that the entropy production is µ ¶ 1 1 .Considering the whole system dqI dqII + T1 T2 e i z }| { z }| { de qI de qII di qI di qII = + + + .8) The quantity de qj is the amount of heat supplied by the environment to hold block j at its fixed temperature. T1 T2 T1 T2 d S dS dS = (47.9) (47. We have still not made a connection to kinetics.10) 327 . − di S = di qI T1 T2 which we see is positive because di qI < 0 when T1 > T2 . Furthermore the heat going out of I through the connecting wall is equal to the heat coming into II through the connecting wall: di qI = −di qII .

328 .P = − P − i vi μi P i vi μi and a ≡ − (4rxn A)T.11) ¶ −Aκ4T di qI = . (47. Extent of reaction: ξ is defined by dξ = dni . Chemical affinity: a ≡ − (4rxn G)T. Entropy Production due to Chemical Reactions Definitions: 1.14) a result we might have guessed.2.12) ¯ To determine T we use the fact that the heat flow out of I is equal to the heat flow into II: di qI −di qII = . T1 − T = − T − T2 ⇒ T = 2 D / D / (47.For this example di qI di S = dt dt From chapter 24 we know µ 1 1 − T1 T2 ¶ (47. −Aκ4T di S = dt D µ 1 1 − T1 T2 (47. dt D So. where ni is the number of moles vi of the ith component and vi the stoichiometric factor of the ith component.V = 2. 47. − ¢ ¢ κ/ κ/ /A ¡ / A ¡¯ ¯ ¯ T1 + T2 .13) dt dt ¯ Using the above expression for heat flow gives us T since.3.

This is because a = − (4rxn A)T.16) but (dA)T.V dq − = (dU)T.V is positive as is v.20) We see that for a spontaneous process the entropy production per unit time is positive.V − T dS ⇒ dS = T T dq e i z}|{ z}|{ dq adξ + dS = T T (47.15) (47.• e.g.17) z }| { z }| { (dA)T.V = X i dξ dt dnH2 dnNH3 dnN2 = = (−1) (−3) (2) (47.V so µ ¶ 1 dni = −adξ μi dni = vi μi vi | i {z }| {z } X −a dξ −adξ (47. 329 ..19) The entropy production per unit time for a chemical reaction is a function of both the chemical affinity and of the reaction rate a dξ a di S = = v≥0 dt T dt T (47. for the reaction N2 + 3H2 → 2NH3 dξ = and a = 2μNH3 − μN2 − 3μH2 The connection to kinetics: reaction rate v = The connection to thermodynamics: (dA)T.18) d S dS (47.

We just saw an example of such a situation with the discussion of simultaneous reactions.Simultaneous Reactions For N simultaneous chemical reactions. It says nothing about the entropy production of the individual component reactions other then the sum of all the component entropy productions must be positive. Thermodynamic coupling need not be confined to coupling between the same types of processes.4. 47. For example in a system of two coupled reactions we could have a1 v1 < 0. the entropy production per unit time generalizes to N 1X di S = aj vj ≥ 0. That is. the so-called Dufour effect is heat flux down a concentration gradient 330 . diffusion is the flux of matter down a concentration gradient. (47. Conversely. Thermodynamic Coupling Processes may be what is called thermodynamically coupled such that a process that normally is not thermodynamically favored can be coupled to another process that is thermodynamically favored so as to allow for the unfavorable process to proceed spontaneously.21) dt T j=1 The second law requires that the total entropy production for simultaneous reactions is positive. a2 v2 > 0 such that a1 v1 + a2 v2 > 0. The socalled Soret effect is flux of matter down a temperature gradient.

The following table lists a number of thermodynamically coupled phenomena Flux Gradient q Thermoconductivity Mechanocaloric effect m Thermomechanical effect Hydrodynamic flow material Soret effect Reverse osmosis Q (charge) Seebeck effect Potential of flow Nernst Potential Electoconductivity T P C ε Dufour effect Peltier effect Osmosis Electrophoresis Diffusion Migration 47.5. If the perturbation is released the system will begin to evolve in time as it heads back towards the thermalized equilibrium state. Echo Phenonmena Consider an ensemble that is perturbed away from thermal equilibrium by some means such as by applying a field. 331 . • Irreversibly — The evolution towards equilibrium cannot be undone–it is irreversible Example: The spin echo in pulsed NMR • A radio frequency pulse prepares an ensemble of nuclear spins such that they are all spinning coherently. The ensemble evolves in two ways • Reversibly — A second perturbation can “undo” or reverse the evolution.

• Now a radio pulse with the opposite phase is applied to make the nuclei spin in the opposite direction • This undoes or reverses the dephasing process and the signal regains strength • The full signal is not recovered however since all the while random thermalization is taking place to irreversibly destroy the coherence among the nuclei. • This cannot be undone with the second radio pulse. 332 . • The different environment (spin frequencies) cause the ensemble spinning nuclei to dephase • Dephasing causes a decrease in the observed signal because now not all nuclei are cooperating. • Each nucleus is in a slightly different environment so each spin frequency is slightly different.• A strong signal is seen because all the spinning nuclei cooperate.

Equations • The Clapeyron Equation is 4φ Hm dP = . The equations are collected here simply for handy reference for you while working the problem sets.23) (47. The equations listed here are out of context and it would help you very little to memorize this section without understanding the context of these equations. This section should not substitute for your studying of the rest of this material.Key Equations for Exam 4 Listed here are some of the key equations for Exam 4. dT T 4φ Vm • The Clausius-Clapeyron equation is 4φ Hm d(ln P ) =− d(1/T ) R • Fick’s first law of diffusion is dC 1 dn = −D A dt dx (47.24) (47.22) 333 333 .

γi (RL) → 1 as Xi → 1 (47.• Fick’s second law of diffusion: ∂ 2C ∂C =D 2.33) = γi (HL) Xi . A dt dx X (47.34) 334 . µ ¶ (47.28) μ = μª + RT ln a (47. 6πηr (47.29) Pi = Xi Pi• (47.32) where kXi is the Henry’s law constant. (47. ∂t ∂x (47.30) = γi (RL) Xi .31) Pi = kXi Xi .26) • Fourier’s law of heat conduction is dT 1 dq = Qf = −κ .27) • Mixing 4mix = properties of soln − • Chemical potential • Raoult’s Law: • Raoult’s law reference ai • Henry’s Law: (RL) properties of pure. γi (HL) → 1 as Xi → 0.25) • Relation between the viscosity and the diffusion constant: D= kT f f =6πηr = kT . kXi = lim • Henry’s law reference ai (HL) Xi →0 Pi Xi . (47. (47.

99. 235. 97. 311 mathematical definition of 146 activity coefficient 146. 131 bond order 77 bonding orbital 71 Born model 170 corrections to 175 enthalpy of solvation 174 entropy of solvation 174 free energy of solvation 173. 178 partition coefficient 174 Born—Oppenheimer approximation 62. 131 Boltzmann’s equation 90.Index absorption spectroscopy 241 activity 146. 312 adiabatic expansion 280 and heat capacity 280 adiabatic wall 120 angular momentum addition of 202 classical 192 eigenfunctions for 199. 240 and the Franck—Condon principle 243 bosons 56 Boyle temperature 272 chain rule for partial derivatives 107 character table for the C2v group 225 chemical affinity 328 chemical potential 144 for a salt 161 relation to activity 148 relation to Gibbs free energy 145 relation to Helmhotz free energy 145 . 96. 219 jj coupling 202 LS coupling 202 quantum numbers 199. 124. 291 temperature corrected 262 atomic orbitals 49 chemists picture 50 physicists picture 50 aufbau principle 58 average value theorem 29 Berthelot gas 13. 219 spin 201 angular momentum quantum number 52 antibonding orbital 71 Arrhenious activation energy 261 Arrhenious equation 261. 270 binominal coefficient 90 blue sky 81 Bohr model 18 335 335 Bohr radius 19 Boltzmann distribution 10.

333 coefficient of thermal expansion 274 coexistence curve 293 colligative properties 318 commutator 30. 300. 231 electrolytes strong 161 electrophoretic effect 167 elementary reactions 255 and stoichiometry 256 molecularity 256 emission spectroscopy 241 enemble 89 ensemble average 103. 133 degeneracy 186 of the ensemble 98 diathermic wall 120 diatomic molecules electron-electron potential energy operator for 61 electronic kinetric energy operator for 61 electronic wavefunction for 62 Hamiltonian for 61 nuclear kinetic energy operator for 61 nuclear-electron potential energy operator for 61 nuclear-nuclear potential energy operator for 61 Schrodinger equation for 62 Dieterici gas 270 diffusion 301 diffusion constant 302 eigenfunction 5 eigenvalue 5 eigenvalue equation 190 electric dipole approximation 79. 189 completeness 191 complimentary variables 30 compressibility factor at the critical point 295 compressibilty factor 270. 132 enthalpy 136 entropy 105 change for changes in temperature 286 change for isothermal expansion 286 change for mixing 287 of real gases 288 entropy production 322. 108 cylindrical symmetry 69 Debye—Huckel limiting law 164. 323 due to chemical reactions 328 due to heat flow 326 equation of state 116 for a Berthelot gas 118 for a Dieterici gas 118 for a Redlich—Kwang gas 118 for a van der Waals gas 117 for an ideal gas 116 for gases 269 equilibrium constant 135 336 .Clapeyron equation 298. 291 configuration 90 confluent hypergeometric functions 65 correspondence principle 41 critical point 300 cyclic rule 14. 333 Clausius-Clapeyron equation 299. 178 Debye—Huckel theory 163 Debye—Huckel—Guggenheim equation 164 Debye’s law 129.

133 Heisenberg uncertainty principle 30 and the harmonic oscillator 41 helium 55 electron-electron repulsion term 55 Hamiltonian 55 Helmholtz free energy 106 Henry’s law 311. 316. 44. 333 Fick’s second law 302.equlibrium constant 153 Euler’s identity 4 expansion of gases 111 reversible 114 extent of reaction 328 Eyring’s equation 265. 334 Franck—Condon integral 243 Franck—Condon principle 243 free energy Gibbs 138 Helmholtz 137 fugacity 147 fundamental transistions 66 general equlibrium 151 generalized displacement 110 generalized force 110 gerade 69 Gibb’s free energy 106 Gibbs-Duhem equation 163 good theory 16 group mathematical definition of 222 multiplication table 223 group theory 221 Hamiltonian operator 27 Hamitonian classical 27 harmonic oscillator 38 energy levels for 40. 86 potential energy 39 Schrodinger equation for 39 heat 109 sign convention 110 heat capacity 115. 334 first law of thermodynamics 121. 334 Hermite polynominals 40 hot bands 66 Hund’s rule 205 hydrogen atom ioniztion energy of 19 hydrogen molecule 74 hydrogenic systems 46 energy levels for 49. 133 flipping coins 90 fluctuation 92 fluorescence 242 stokes shift 242 Fourier’s law of heat conduction 306. 291 fermions 56 Fick’s first law 302. 334 Henry’s law constant 316. 85 potential energy for 47 Schrodinger equation for 47 wavefunction (no spin) 49 wavefunction (with spin) 52 ideal solution Raoult’s law 314 immiscible solutions 153 infrared spectroscopy 66 internal energy 103. 121 intramolecular vibrational relaxation (IVR) 242 337 . 86 Hamiltonian 47 normalization constant 49.

86 Schrodinger equation for 65 wavefunction for 65 Morse potential 64. 86.inversion symmetry 69 operator 69 ion mobility 166 and current 168 ion transfer 174 IR spectroscopy 231 and the character table 232 isothermal compressibility 274 isothermal expansion 279 Joule expansion 282 Joule-Thomson expansion 283 kinetic theory of gases 250 Lagrange multipliers 95 Laguerre polynominals 49 laminar flow 304 law of corresponding states 296 law of rectilinear diameters 293 Legendra polynomials 200 linear combinations of atomic orbitals (LCAO) 72 Lorenz number 307 many electron atom Hamlitonian for 59 maximal work 113 Maxwell relations 140 Maxwell’s distribution of speeds 252. 240 force constant associated with 9 Taylor series expansion of 8 normal modes 229 operator Hermitian 189 ladder 195 linear 189 symmetry 222 operator algebra 187 orientation quantum number 53 orthogonality 191 overtone transitions 66 parameters extensive 109 intensive 109 338 . 290 mean ionic activity 162 mean ionic activity coefficient 162 method of initial velocities 259 method of isolation 259 microstate 90 Mie scattering 84 mirror plane symmetry 70 molar heat capacity 115 molecular collisions simple model for 252 molecular hydrogen ion 67 Hamiltonian for 67 molecular orbital diagram 76 molecular orbitals 68 molecular rotations 235 asymmetric tops 239 centrifugal stretching 236 linear tops 238 polyatomic molecules 237 spherical tops 239 symmetric tops 238 vibrational state dependence of 236 molecular vibrations 228 molecule Scrodinger equation for 78 momentum operator 5 Morse oscillator 64 energy levels for 65. 290 mean free path 253.

312. 87 reaction velocity 255. 314. 44. 82. 247 rotational energy levels 200. 291 reciprocal rule 108 red sunsets 82 Redlich-Kwang gas 270 reference states 147 relationship between CP and CV 139. 181 energy levels 183 energy levels for 34.particle in a box 31. 132 vibrational 101. 219 339 . 131 electronic 101 grand canonical 97 isothermal—isobaric 97 microcanonical 96 molecular 100 rotational 101. 132 Pauli exclusion principle 56 consquences of 58 perturbation theory 207 example of the quartic oscillator 208 phase diagram 300 Poiseuille’s formula 304 polarizability 79 postulate I (of quantum mechanics) 22 postulate II (of quantum mechanics) 24 postulate III (of quantum mechanics) 25 pressure 104 principle of Clausius 125. 133 Raman scattering 80 Raman spectroscopy 66. 132 translational 101. 218 particle on a ring 194 boundary conditions 194 energy levels for 195. 233 and the character table 234 Raoult’s law 311. 44. 276 relaxation effects 167 rigid rotor 200 degeneracy of 235. 218 features of the energy levels 35 normalization constant for 33 potenial energy 31 Schrodinger equation for 32 three dimensional 183 three dimensional energy levels 185 three dimensional wavefunction 185 wavefunction for 183 wavefunctions for 34. 248 energy 235. 334 deviations from 315 reference state 315 rate law 255 rate laws 254 determination of 258 integrated 259 Rayleigh scattering 80 Rayleigh scattering law 81. 324 principle quantum number 52 probability amplitude 22 probability distribution 22 PV work 111. 218 partition coefficient 154 and drug delivery 155 for the Born model 174 partition function canonical 96. 218 Hamitonian for 194 wavefunctions for 195.

219 Hamiltonian for 212 Tyndall scattering 84 ungerade 69 van der Waals equation 340 . 133 tips for solving problems 2 total derivative 107 transfer matrix 11 triple point 300 two level system 211 ‘left’ and ‘right’ states 213. 200 spin 201 quantum number 51. 133 statements of 127 simple collision theory 262 Slater determinant 58 for lithium 59 solar system model 17 solvation 169 solvophobic effect 176 specific heat 115 spherical harmonic functions 48. 53 spin-orbit coupling 205 Hamiltonian 205 interaction energy 205 spontaneous process 142 state function 121 table of important ones 136 Sterlings approximation 92 Stoke’s law 167. 304 STP 120 superposition 191 systems types of 108 temperature 115 term symbols 204 thermal conductivity 301 of gases 306 of liquids 306 thermal equilibrium 120 third law of thermodynamics 128. 53 wavefunction 51 spin orientation quantum number 51.degeneracy of 200 rotational Hamiltonian 200 rule of mutual exclusion 234 Rydberg constant 20 SATP 120 Schrodinger equation time dependent 214 time independent 27 second law “local” formulation 324 second law of thermodynamics 126.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful